Skip to main content

Full text of "Photography for the sportsman naturalist"

See other formats


2), PHOTOGRAPHY 
@ FORTHE 
| SPORTSMAN 
y)) NATURALIST: 


: = Ww. BROWNELL 


iS 
oS 
S 
< 
e 
w 
3 


CORNELL LAB of ORNITHOLOGY 
LIBRARY 


AT SAPSUCKER WOODS 


Ilustration of Snowy Owl by Louis Agassiz Fuertes: 


HO 
3 1924 090 300 033 


DATE DUE 


GAYLORD 


PRINTED INUS.A 


THE AMERICAN SPORTSMAN’S LIBRARY 


EDITED BY 


CASPAR WHITNEY 


PHOTOGRAPHY 


FOR THE 


SPORTSMAN NATURALIST 


eThe 


PHOTOGRAPHY 


FOR THE 


SPORTSMAN NATURALIST 


BY 


L. W. BROWNELL 


New Work 


THE MACMILLAN COMPANY 
LONDON: MACMILLAN & CO., L1p. 


1904 


All rights reserved 


CopyrIGHT, 1904, 


By THE MACMILLAN COMPANY. 


Set up and electrotyped. Published November, 1904. 


Norwood Press 
F. 8. Cushing G Co. — Berwick G Smith Co. 
Norwood, Mass. U.S.A. 


TO 


fav (Mother 


WHO, BY HER APPRECIATION OF AND INTEREST 
IN MY WORK, 
HAS BEEN MY GREATEST AID 
I AFFECTIONATELY DEDICATE THIS VOLUME 


CONTE NGS 


CHAPTER PAGE 


I. NatTuRE PHOTOGRAPHY: ITS SCOPE AND USEFUL- 


NESS . : : : . : : : : I 
II]. PHOTOGRAPHY AND THE SPORTSMAN . : - Ig 
III. CAMERAS, LENSES, AND SHUTTERS 5 é = 20 
IV. THE DaRK ROOM: DEVELOPING AND PRINTING . 49 
V. THe TELEPHOTOGRAPHIC LENS AND ITs USES & Yfe) 
VI. APPARATUS FOR A FIELD WORKER : 5 . 81 

VII. PHOTOGRAPHING THE LARGER ANIMALS : » 102 

VIII. PHOTOGRAPHING THE SMALLER MAMMALS . enl23 
IX. PHOTOGRAPHING Birps’ NESTS : : : = 138 
X. PHOTOGRAPHING BIRDS AND THEIR YOUNG . . 160 
XI. PHOTOGRAPHING INSECTS 5 : ; : . Igo 


XII. PHOTOGRAPHING FISH AND OTHER FORMS OF 
AQUATIC LIFE . 4 ‘ 5 E a A ols! 
XIII. PHOTOGRAPHING REPTILES, ETC. . 3 : # Dey) 


XIV. PHOTOGRAPHING WILD FLOWERS, CUT AND GROW- 


ING. 5 5 A : é 5 5 6 wil 

XV. PHOTOGRAPHING TREES, FUNGI, ETC. . 3 - 268 
XVI. PHOTOGRAPHING IN THE ZOOS A A : a Pah 
XVII. PHOTOGRAPHY IN CAMP AND Woops . : « 292 
INDEX . : . : : : 305 


vii 


ILLUSTRATIONS 


Song Sparrow Family . 6 4 F j : Frontispiece 
PAGE 

Taken, from a distance of about 75 yards, with an eight-inch 
lens és 5 6 : A z . : : 7 270 

Taken, from same distance as photograph on page 76, with 
same lens and telephoto attachment ¢ : o & | 9S) 
American Elk, Horns in Velvet. ‘ 5 - 104 
Half-grown White-tailed Buck > . a : : . III 
White-tailed Deer. Doe 9 . 4 3 fl : oe this 
Prairie Dog at Entrance to Burrow 3 : : 4 eel) 
Cotton Mouse : : : : . 4 4 : 2 25 
Fox Squirrel . : : é 5 a . . ; a Way 
Half-grown Woodchuck . ‘ 0 5 9 5 8 . 130 
Porcupine feeding on Root . . 3 g é a tee} 
Muskrat a ; . é . 0 . 5 a ley 
Little Brown Bat nee ¢ . 3 ° . RIS 
Nest and Eggs of Ruffed Grouse . a o : 3 - 140 
Nest and Eggs of Green Heron. d ‘ é : 2 12 
Nest and Eggs of Spotted Sandpiper. : a - 143 
Nest and Eggs of Chestnut-sided Warbler in Low Bush . = 146 
Nest and Eggs of Kingbird . : : 4 , : - 149 
Nest and Eggs of American Crow . 0 a 0 . - 152 


Bluebird’s Nest and Eggs 6 . : 0 : - 155 
Entrance Holes to Bank Swallows’ Nests ° ° 5 » 157 
Nest of Bank Swallow . 0 : ° 0 2 : - 158 
Wild Turkey Hen . a 4 5 6 €@ 8 6 TG 


x Tlusirations 


Red-eyed Vireo at Nest feeding Young . 


Field Sparrow on Nest 

Chipping Sparrow feeding Young 
Young Flickers 

Screech Owl asleep by Nest Hole 
Bluebird at Nest Hole 

Young Shrikes at Nest 
Chickadee feeding Young 

Young Blackbirds . 

Young Downy Woodpeckers . 
Young Wood Thrush 

American Crow 

Young Green Herons 

Spider repairing Web 

Lana Moth hanging from Cocoon . 
Mourning-cloak Butterfly 

Larva of Walnut Moth 

Newly Emerged Cecropia Moth 
Cabbage Butterfly . 

Black Swallow-tails 

Moths asleep in Daytime 

Moth on Tree Trunk 

Dragon Flies . 

Common Crab 

Jellyfish . 

Sea Anemones 

Milk Snake 

Garter Snake . 

Common Frog 

Snapping Turtle 

Tree Toad “ singing ” 


Common Toad 


Illustrations 


Shinleaf in Tangle of Herbage 
Blue Flag 

Jack-in-pulpit 

Tansy 

Spring Orchis 

White Violets 

Young Skunk Cabbage 
Trailing Arbutus 

Common Purple Violets 
Bank of Christmas Ferns 
Indian Pipes . 3 
White Birch in Winter . 
Trunk of Red Cedar 

Locust Blossoms 

Spruce Cones 

Blossoms of American Chestnut 
Mushrooms 

Head of Lion . 

Snowy Herons 3 
Head of White-tailed Deer 
White Pelican 

Trophies 

Hitting the Trail 

A Temporary Shack 
Whipping a Mountain Stream 
In Quiet Waters 

Bringing in the Quarry . 

A Fair Shot 

Finis 


INTRODUCTION 


NEARLY a century has passed since the first experi- 
ments, that amounted to anything, were made in trying 
to reproduce the image of any object, mechanically, by 
means of light rays. 

Niepce was, probably, the first to start these experi- 
ments, but almost simultaneously with him Daguerre 
commenced work along slightly different lines and he 
gave the result of his researches to the world, while 
Niepce hesitated to publish even the smallest details 
concerning his, so that we have come to consider Da- 
guerre as the real father of photography. 

For many years the advancement in the photographic 
art was extremely slow, but for the past twenty years 
it has advanced with enormous strides, until now we 
have but one thing more to look forward to,—the taking 
of photographs in natural colors. To attain this object 
scientists have been working for some years, but no 
material results have as yet been accomplished. 

The first photographic process which was of any 
commercial value was invented by Daguerre, and named 
after him, “daguerreotype.” This process was finally 
perfected, after tedious years of experimenting, in 1839, 
and held sway in both England and America for about 
twelve years. The two most serious objections to it 
were the cost of the plate, which was excessive, and 
the impracticability of multiplying the reproduction, 


owing to the opacity of the plate. 
xili 


xiv Introduction 


This was practically the commencement of photog- 
raphy, and its invention entitles Daguerre to rank with 
the foremost inventors of the nineteenth century. 

At the same time that Daguerre was pursuing his 
researches in France an Englishman, named Fox Talbot, 
was working along somewhat similar lines in England, 
and in 1841 he patented what he called the calotype 
process. 

It is unnecessary to go into a description here of 
these two processes. Suffice it to say that the image 
was made in the former on copper, plated with silver, 
while in the latter it was made upon paper. This latter 
was really a negative, for on it the qualities of the 
image were reversed as we now have them on our dry 
plates. The correct picture, in black and white, was 
obtained by oiling the original, which caused it to 
become transparent, and then printing through it on to 
another piece of sensitized paper, exactly as we do at 
the present time. 

The collodion process of glass plates was the next 
great step in advancement. It was invented by an 
Englishman named Scott Archer, and was first given 
to the world in 1851. In a few years it had so far 
displaced both the calotype and the daguerreotype 
that it reigned supreme from 1855 to 1880. 

Up to about 1853 a photograph was considered noth- 
ing short of a curiosity, but with the introduction and 
perfection of the collodion process photography be- 
came an almost popular pursuit. In the collodion 
process, as introduced by Archer, it was absolutely 
necessary that the glass plates, coated with collodion 
containing iodide and nitrate of silver, should be ex- 


Introduction xv 


posed while wet and developed immediately after the 
exposure, before the surface had time to dry. 

While a collodion dry plate was invented shortly 
after Archer’s process was given to the public, still it 
did not supersede the wet plate, and it was not until 
the late seventies that the gelatine negative plate was 
introduced. 

The years from 1877 to 1880 could be called, photo- 
graphically, the years of the struggle between the wet 
and the dry plate processes; but the dry plate won, as 
was bound to be the case from its greater practicability, 
and in a few years it completely took the place of the 
antiquated wet plate. 

Now commenced the rapid advancement in photog- 
raphy that has not yet ceased. New and better appli- 
ances were constantly being perfected. Every year 
saw a faster lens and shutter on the market. Men of 
the arts and sciences took greater and greater interest 
in photography, until, finally, when the apparatus had 
reached that stage of perfection that permitted it, 
nature workers took up the camera. 

Nowadays the equipment of a worker in any of the 
branches of the natural sciences is incomplete unless 
it includes a photographic outfit, and it should be so 
with the sportsman. 

It is in the hopes of inducing many who have here- 
tofore never used a camera to take it up, and of helping 
those who wish to photograph the wild denizens of our 
woods, fields, and streams, that this book is written. 

It is distinctly a book for the beginner, and to the 
expert in nature photography it will probably prove of 
little or no use. The suggestions and advice which I 


xvi Introduction 


have given are based mostly on my own, partly on 
others’, experience, and should they clash with the 
ideas of any of my fellow-workers, I trust they will not 
be too harsh in their criticism, but will remember that 
two workers in the same field hardly ever follow along 
identical lines. 

Even to the beginner it is written with the intention 
of merely starting him properly, so that he may lose as 
little time as possible in learning things by sad experi- 
ence. However, this is bound to happen, to a greater 
or less extent; and, after all, Experience is the best 
teacher, for what we learn at her hands we are apt 
never to forget. As he advances along his chosen line 
of work he will find less and less use for this book, 
until, finally, he will discard it entirely, and then, un- 
doubtedly, will shortly be able to teach me new tricks 
and methods. If, however, in the meantime, it has 
helped him to a better knowledge of the task before 
him, it will have served its purpose, and I shall be 
content. 

I have endeavored to make it as complete a text-book 
of nature photography as possible, and as such I have 
devoted two chapters to the camera, lens, shutter, etc., 
and to the manipulation of the plates in developing and 
printing. This may, to many, seem an unnecessary 
waste of space, but to any one who is taking up the 
camera for the first time a thorough knowledge of all 
this is absolutely essential. 

In other chapters I have treated each branch of 
nature photography separately, giving in each case, as 
fully and explicitly as possible, the directions, as I know 
them, for obtaining the best results. I have, in fact, 


Introduction xvil 


made each chapter practically a separate book, even to 
the extent of often repeating myself, in order that any 
one looking for a certain piece of information need 
not be forced to look through the entire volume before 
he can find it. Now, if he wishes to take up a single 
branch of nature work, —the photography of birds, for 
instance, —he has but to read the three chapters on the 
camera, the dark room, and bird photography in order 
to get all the information which this book can vouch- 
safe him. 

Work in nature is, at its best, one of the most diff- 
cult branches of all photographic art, and knowing as 
I do how many and various are the difficulties and 
how enormous they seem to a beginner, it has been 
my endeavor to set forth, as clearly as possible, all 
the devices by which these difficulties can best be 
surmounted. 

I can look back now and see how much valuable 
time I lost, when I first entered this field, by having to 
learn everything for myself, —time that could have been 
used to so much better advantage had I but had a 
better knowledge of my subject before I started. So 
I am endeavoring to give that knowledge, which I have 
gained in the number of years during which I have 
been, more or less constantly, working with my camera 
among the wild life, to him who is about to enter the 
same paths, and I am trusting that, to those who really 
need aid, this volume will be welcome and prove of 
some material use. 

The camera, particularly in the last half-dozen years, 
has done much toward making wild animal life real to 
those who have never had the opportunity of seeing it 


xviii Introduction 


in its natural state, and has aided tremendously in the 
nature movement now assuming so much force and 
importance in our schools and elsewhere. We need 
more serious workers, however, — more who will take it 
up, not as a mere pastime, but with the object in view 
of increasing the world’s stock of knowledge, and I 
wish that I might induce many to do so. 

The illustrations throughout the volume are, of course, 
from life, and were made, with a few exceptions, amid 
the natural surroundings. Those which were made from 
captive animals were taken in the Bronx Zodlogical 
Park, New York City. The nests were taken, in every 
instance, zz sz¢ and often at great trouble. 

These photographs were principally selected from a 
collection of about three thousand negatives taken by 
myself, but I wish to acknowledge my indebtedness to 
Mr. F. M. Hale and Mr. S. D. Dixon for the use of 
those which are attributed to them. 


PHOTOGRAPHY 


FOR THE 


SPORTSMAN NATURALIST 


Photography for the Sportsman 
Naturalist 


CHAPTER: I 


NATURE PHOTOGRAPHY: ITS SCOPE AND 
USEFULNESS 


Ir is of comparatively late years (about seven 
or eight) that the camera has been used for pic- 
turing our wild life to any extent; but so very 
rapid has been the advancement in this branch 
of the camerist’s art that photographs that were 
once deemed impossible — pictures of animals in 
their native haunts, of birds flying and attending 
to their home duties, of fish in their natural ele- 
ment, of insects during the various stages of their 
metamorphoses —are now obtained, not always 
exactly easily, but with at least not too great a tax 
upon the ingenuity and resources of the operator. 

This has been made possible, to a large extent, 
by the immense improvement in apparatus that 
has been accomplished in the past few years, and 
especially by the extremely rapid lenses that have 
been placed upon the market, making an expos- 
ure of a thousandth of a second practicable. 

B I 


2 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


It is difficult to say just who was the pioneer in 
this line of photography, if indeed there was any 
single person who could be called by that name. 
Many tried it tentatively and, obtaining but indif- 
ferent results, grew discouraged and gave it up. 
Others attempted it, but did not seem to grasp 
the subject with a thorough understanding or else 
were not well enough versed in the use of their 
apparatus or in the habits of their subjects, for the 
results they turned out were anything but good. 

Finally, however, some eight years or so ago, 
a number of serious workers entered the field 
almost simultaneously, each one determined to 
do his best to show what could be accomplished 
with a camera among the wild life of the woods 
and fields. As soon as these workers had cleared 
a way, so to speak, had shown the others how to 
surmount the many difficulties that had been con- 
fronting them and which had proved too much 
for them to tackle single-handed, there were 
plenty ready to follow, as is always the case in 
almost any enterprise. 

Many of these soon lost their interest, however. 
The results seemed too few for the energy ex- 
pended, and so they one by one dropped out of the 
ranks, until to-day there are but comparatively few 
serious workers still left in the field. These, how- 
ever, are the ones who naturally would rise to the 
top,—those who entered into the work for the 


Nature Photography 3 


love of it and the love of the wild things with 
which it brought them into close contact, and 
who had tenacity and determination enough to 
stick at it, no matter how many were the difficul- 
ties that confronted them. 

One of the first to do the best work in this 
country was a close friend of mine; a man who 
all his life had been an ardent sportsman, but 
who laid down his rifle and shot-gun to take up 
the camera in their stead. He has never had 
cause to regret the exchange, for he has found 
just as much excitement in the hunt with a cam- 
era as with a gun and much more pleasure in the 
results. Many of his pictures stand to-day as the 
best in their line and will undoubtedly so stand 
for all time, as it would seem to be impossible to 
improve upon them. 

Nature work with a camera forms an epoch, 
not only in the photographic world, but in the art 
of illustrating as well. Heretofore, in our nature 
works and sportsman’s books we have had to be 
content with drawings, always inaccurate, often 
ludicrous, and sometimes even grotesque in their 
untruthfulness to nature. This was not always 
the fault of the artist, for there is nothing more 
difficult truthfully to portray with pen or brush 
than the wild life. These unnatural illustrations 
are now a thing of the past, for photographs have 
superseded them. 


4 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


While the camera can be made to lie, despite 
the fact that it has been said that it cannot, yet 
it never does except when made to do so, or by 
accident, and the pictures obtained by means of it 
are pretty sure to be absolutely true to life, accu- 
rate in drawing and detail, and showing the subject 
exactly as it was when the shutter was snapped. 
The camera can do more in the fraction of a sec- 
ond than the most skilful artist can accomplish 
through hours of hard labor. 

The scope of nature photography is almost 
limitless, its only real limitation being the im- 
practicability of photographing in color. To be 
sure, photographs can and have been made by 
what is known as the three-color process, but this 
is at its best unsatisfactory, often giving false color 
values, and so I always advocate the use of mono- 
tones in their reproduction. 

The field to be covered, however, is endless, as 
one soon discovers when he enters it, and a single 
lifetime is too short a while in which to do all 
that one would along these lines. If each one 
can contribute a little of the best of his work, 
however, to increase the stock of the world’s 
knowledge, for all he knows that little may be of 
great value and importance. 

As a means, also, of studying nature there is 
nothing so helpful as a camera, for not only does 
it aid us in seeing things that might otherwise be 


Nature Photography 5 


passed by unnoticed, but it enables us to make 
accurate records of the things which we do see, 
and it causes us to be constantly on the outlook 
for those things. It helps to teach us the value of 
animal life, and the senseless and absolutely wan- 
ton killing of that life which is constantly going 
on would cease if there was only a greater knowl- 
edge of its value. 

The sweeping manner in which the farmer and 
sportsman condemn all birds of prey because of 
the offences of the few aptly exemplifies the old 
adage that “A little knowledge is a dangerous 
thing.” The farmer misses a pullet, finding in its 
place a few scattered feathers, or he may see a 
hawk swoop down and carry off one of his pet 
broilers, spreading dire confusion among the rest. 
The sportsman, while beating the woods for his 
game, finds the remains of a quail, and at once 
concludes that it has been the victim of some 
depredating ow]. Without further investigation 
and with absolutely no knowledge of the subject, 
they both sweepingly and generally condemn the 
whole family of Raptores, letting no opportunity 
pass to destroy one of its members. 

If the man who kills a hawk, or even a snake, 
would first learn something of its habits, he would 
in all probability find that he was about to kill 
one of his best friends. 

Did the farmer but know it, he is, in killing the 


6 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


hawk, but aiding in the extermination of one of 
his very good allies, who, by catching and eating 
numerous of the small rodents and insects which 
injure his crops, helps him materially in gaining 
his livelihood. The sportsman might well ask 
himself who has the better right to the quail,— he 
who shoots it for the pleasure it affords him, or 
the owl who takes it in order that he may live? 
In point of fact, however, the owls, and but few 
of the entire family Raptores, catch game or other 
birds to any extent, and we are doing them a grave 
injustice when we unreservedly accuse them all. 

It is these and other useful facts that the camera 
helps us to learn, and so, as the interest in natural 
history is constantly on the increase, it is well 
that we who may should turn our attention and 
devote our energies toward photographing, in 
detail, almost any common object in nature, es- 
pecially as nowadays nearly every one, young or 
old, possesses some kind of a camera. 

The scientific value of nature photography hes 
largely in the fact that, as I have already stated, 
the results are accurate and true to life, and by 
no other means can the wild life be so truthfully 
portrayed. No mere wordy description, no draw- 
ing, no matter how good, can adequately answer 
the purpose. Where is the artist who can repro- 
duce the intricate construction of a bird’s nest so 
perfectly as can the camera? Or where is the 


Nature Photography 7 


writer, clever though he may be with his pen, who 
can give us as clear a conception of the manifold 
duties of a bird’s daily life as can a series of pho- 
tographs? In accuracy of detail as well as artistic 
conception the late W. Hamilton Gibson far sur- 
passed all other artists in his delineation of animal 
and insect life, and yet he left much to be desired. 
He was not infallible. The camera, when prop- 
erly used, is. 

Then, too, a photograph of any animal life that 
is now common may at some future time be of 
extreme value to naturalists, for we can never tell 
how soon any of the mammals or birds may be- 
come extinct. 

Some species of herons are rapidly becoming 
fewer and fewer in number, and may soon be a 
thing of the past; and photographic records of the 
few remaining large rookeries which exist in this 
country, where once there were many, will pre- 
serve for all time to come impressions of con- 
ditions which will soon be no more. 

What would the scientists of to-day not give if 
only our ancestors of the past ages had been 
versed in camera art and had left, among their 
other relics, photographic plates of the monsters 
that at that time inhabited the world. That, of 
course, is stretching the limits of the possible; 
but to come down to more modern times, what an 
invaluable addition to our knowledge of the life 


8 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


and habits of the great auk or the pied duck, both 
of which have within recent years become extinct, 
would be a series of photographs of them taken 
when they were fairly numerous, as they once were. 

The younger generation of to-day can hardly 
believe the stories of the immense flights of the 
passenger pigeon which so frequently occurred 
only a few years ago. These birds suddenly be- 
came almost extinct, and the country which once 
knew them literally by the thousands upon thou- 
sands now rarely sees one. What became of them 
forms one of the mysteries of nature, and it is en- 
tirely probable that future generations will think 
the stories told of their numbers nothing but 
pieces of pure fiction, while, if there were but 
some photographs to back up these facts, they 
could not help but believe. 

This is also true of the buffalo which once 
inhabited our Western plains in such immense 
herds, but of which there is now only one known 
wild herd in existence, and this composed only of 
a few individuals. Of what surpassing interest 
would be photographs of these immense herds 
that were once such common sights. 

Unfortunately the birth of nature photography 
is of too recent a date for us to have these records, 
which would have been invaluable; but we all 
have it in our power to leave for future genera- 
tions photographs which may be to them just as 


Nature Photography 9 


absorbingly interesting as these would have been 
to us. Then why not, rather than devoting our 
cameras and our time to the producing of irre- 
deemably bad bits of scenery and snap shots of 
our friends, turn our energies into the making of 
nature pictures and do something that will be 
worth while? There is room for all who wish 
to enter this field, and there are plenty of direc- 
tions along which one may work and never tire 
or find that he has reached the end of his road. 
Unless you intend to take it up seriously, how- 
ever, you had much better remain where you are 
and continue in your course of “snapping,” for 
there are already too many of the mere dabblers. 
As I have already said, there are but few really 
serious workers in the field, but there are many 
who work at it in the most amateurish of ways 
and who seem to have no care to improve their 
methods or better their results. These results 
are, for the most part, poor, or, at the best, indif- 
ferently passable, and they are not only no credit 
to their makers, but often prove a serious detri- 
ment to those few who are doing something. 
Their authors do not hesitate to use any means 
that will obtain for them some kind of results with 
the least possible expenditure of energy or patience. 
They even go so far as to use stuffed subjects and 
be willing to swear that they were alive, when the 
veriest novice could detect the falsehood. This 


10 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


tends to cast a doubt, in the minds of those who 
cannot detect the real from the false, over all the 
products of the nature workers, and so I say that 
the men who do these things are a hinderance to 
the advancement of nature photography. 

I remember once seeing a lady looking at a 
photograph of mine that happened to be in an 
exhibition. It was a picture of an old bird feed- 
ing her young, and the exposure had been made 
at just the happy moment when she was in the 
very act of giving the food to one of the fledg- 
lings. It is one of my favorite photographs of all 
those which I have taken, and it cost me some 
four hours of patient waiting to obtain. Naturally 
it rather disgusted me to hear the lady exclaim to 
a companion, “Oh! I know how that was done; 
the birds were stuffed and wired to the branch.” 
Perhaps I should have immediately corrected her 
and pointed out to her the reasons why it could 
not have been a stuffed bird, but would she have 
thanked me for doing so? I think not. So I 
sat down instead and moralized to myself on the 
futility of striving for the best results when those 
results received no more praise or commendation 
than almost worthless ones. 

But it is worth while to do your best work and 
always to attempt to make your photographs from 
living wild subjects. They are the only ones that 
have any real value, and not everybody in the 


Nature Photography II 


world is like the lady quoted above. She un- 
doubtedly had known of some one who made 
photographs in the way she mentioned and so 
jumped to the conclusion that all others must, 
necessarily, do the same. 

Not many months ago I saw, in one of our 
leading monthly magazines, an article on nest- 
ing birds illustrated with photographs which the 
author took care to explain had taken him many 
hours of hard work to obtain. No doubt he 
had spent some time in shooting, stuffing, and 
arranging his specimens, for, to a practised eye, 
it was entirely obvious that, without an excep- 
tion, they were stuffed birds. No doubt many 
who read that article were entirely credulous 
and thought the results wonderful; but there 
were many others, like myself, who were dis- 
gusted with it, and who thought it no credit, 
not only to the author, but to the editor of the 
magazine who had allowed such productions to 
pass muster. In another magazine I also remem- 
ber seeing the photograph of a deer which was 
such a poor specimen of the taxidermist’s art that 
no one who had ever seen a deer alive could be 
fooled by it, and yet the author of the monstrosity 
had the temerity to describe at length just how 
he had obtained it and what hours of patience 
and hard work it had cost him. 

I cite these instances to show the beginner 


12 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


what pitfalls are awaiting him, and as a warning 
not to fall into them. 

This is but one step, and a very poor one, in 
advance of the old-time methods of illustrating 
works on nature. Indeed, I am not certain that 
it is not a retrograde movement. There is much 
to be said in favor of the old style over this, for, 
surely, the artists never claimed more for their 
drawings than appeared on the face of them, while 
the authors of these photographs do all they can 
to mislead people into the belief that they are the 
truthful representation of living things, while they 
are almost always entirely false in drawing, pose, 
and surroundings. 

I can readily understand why it is that some 
who call themselves photographer naturalists can 
allow themselves to be led into these falsehoods, 
especially if their consciences are not in active 
operation. The photographing of any of our wild 
cousins is, at the best, difficult, and, to one who is 
not working conscientiously for the best possible 
results, anything, no matter what, that tends to 
lessen the obstacles, is welcome. To take ad- 
vantage of any means that will make the diffi- 
culties fewer is perfectly legitimate so long as the 
means employed does not tend to detract from the 
realism of the finished picture, but photographs 
of stuffed animals never were known to make 
realistic pictures, 


Nature Photography 13 


Unfortunately, also, there are many who, while 
they decry the use of mounted specimens, work 
on a different method, which gives just as poor 
results. 

They, apparently, do not consider it at all 
necessary that the ensemble of the picture be 
natural so long as the image of the beast, bird, 
or whatever the main object may be is large and 
well defined. To gain these ends they employ 
methods, in many instances, which, by removing 
the subject from its natural surroundings, show it 
in a false position and make the picture untrue 
to nature. 

In a branch of photography the results of which 
must, obviously, be true to nature if they would 
have any real value, one cannot afford to miss any 
of the small details that go to make up a truthful 
whole in depicting incidents in the everyday life 
of birds or beasts. In order that we should miss 
none of these details, it is equally obvious that 
these wild things should be photographed in their 
native haunts, and I cannot think that removing 
them to a studio especially prepared, as some 
photographers do, and keeping them there until 
they are reduced from their original wild condi- 
tion to a state of semi-tameness before photograph- 
ing them is true nature photography, no matter 
what backgrounds and surroundings may be 
arranged to make them feel and look at ease. 


14. Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


Of course, if one wants simply pictures of the 
animals themselves, this method is all right; but 
then we should not attempt to give the impres- 
sion that they were photographed in the open by 
using home-made surroundings and accessories of 
grass, leaves, tree-trunks, rocks, etc., but should 
photograph them free from all surroundings and 
leave the products to speak for themselves as 
mere anatomical studies of the animals. The 
use of these accessories is misleading in its 
results, for while these results may be perfect 
pictures of the animals themselves the idea con- 
veyed by them to the average mind of how these 
same animals live their everyday life is almost 
certain to be erroneous, for there is almost 
invariably a false note struck somewhere. 

I have in mind a certain picture of a woodcock, 
taken by a well-known advocate of this method 
of work, in which, while the photograph of the 
bird itself is admirable, the setting is so obviously 
manufactured as to give one the impression that 
it is nothing more or less than a reproduction of 
a rather poorly mounted specimen. 

It may be that I am hypercritical; that, having 
worked for years among the inhabitants of the 
fields and woods in my chosen branch of study, 
natural history, I have come to know our wild 
neighbors of the ground and air too well, and that 
in consequence I can too easily detect any false 


Nature Photography 15 


note struck by the photographer. That these 
false notes do exist, and that photographs con- 
taining them are constantly being turned out, I 
think no one who has kept in touch with recent 
literature upon the subject and who is well ac- 
quainted with his wild brethren can deny. 

It is a pity that this should be so, that a branch 
of photography that holds such limitless possi- 
bilities in the material aid which it can give to 
the advancement of the natural sciences should be 
injured, as it is being injured, by unconscientious 
workers. It is a field where each worker should 
unhesitatingly give what aid he can to each new 
worker entering it, where all should pull together 
as much as is possible, where no petty jealousies 
or rivalries should exist, and, above all, where no 
one should resort to tricks or chicanery to obtain 
results. 

Therefore I would that none might enter it 
except those who do so with the intention of 
doing the best possible work along their chosen 
lines. These I would gladly welcome to the 
ranks of the nature photographers, and to these 
do I wish to speak in this book, and most espe- 
cially to those sportsmen who wish either to 
exchange their gun for a camera or to combine 
the pleasures of hunting with a camera with those 
of hunting with a gun. 

It is these men who are best fitted for this work 


16 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


and who have the best opportunities for obtaining 
valuable photographs, for they have the first es- 
sential, —knowledge of the wild life which they 
would photograph. Also they have the time to 
devote to the work which a great many of us can- 
not give, and the pursuit of their quarry takes 
them, naturally, to such places as are most favor- 
able for photographing wild life and where it is 
most prolific. 

Let no one enter this field, however, without 
a due appreciation of the difficulties which are 
before him, for if he begins with the idea that it 
is easy sailing, the undeceiving process is likely 
to prove painful. There is no pursuit that I 
know of that contains more disappointments, and 
there is none that requires a larger amount of 
patience. Job would have made a good nature 
photographer, if all the accounts which we hear 
of his stock of patience are true, for with a suffi- 
cient amount of this commodity judiciously mixed 
with a modicum of ingenuity and common sense, 
every obstacle that presents itself can be over- 
come. 

It is no unusual thing for one to work a whole 
day, and work hard too, only to be forced to quit 
at nightfall with no results to show. I have done 
this frequently. The most disheartening part, 
though, is to take home a batch of exposed plates 
which we have every reason to believe should 


Nature Photography iy 


turn out to be good negatives, only to find, when 
we get into the dark room with them, that they 
are all irredeemably bad. 

This will happen to all, as it often has to me, 
and it is almost enough to make one forswear the 
use of the camera altogether. Perseverance will 
always win in the end, however, and when we do 
get something that is really good the pleasure is 
so much the greater for the many disappointments 
which we have undergone. 

One great thing to remember, as all woodsmen 
know, is that a wild animal is much more easily 
frightened by noise than he is by movement; in 
fact, many animals are curious enough to ap- 
proach a moving object to discover what it is, 
when a sudden, quick movement or a noise would 
immediately frighten them away. This can be, 
and often is, taken advantage of by those who 
photograph the larger animals especially. 

But the key-note of success with all wild things 
is gentleness and quietness of movement. Do 
nothing hurriedly or with quick, sudden move- 
ments, and above all, make just as little noise as 
possible. 

Do not be discouraged if at first you do not 
get more than one or two good negatives out of 
every ten or a dozen plates exposed. This will 
be a fair average for a beginner. As you become 
more and more proficient the average will in- 

Cc 


18 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


crease, but at no time must you expect to obtain 
a good negative with every exposure. It is there- 
fore a good plan, when it is possible, to make 
more than one exposure on the same subject; it 
lessens the chance of failure. 

This is not a “press the button” kind of pho- 
tography, but it requires all the ingenuity and 
taxes all the resources which one has at his com- 
mand, and the results are a lasting pleasure, fully 
repaying us for all the expenditure of time, energy, 
and patience. 


CHAPTER II 
PHOTOGRAPHY AND THE SPORTSMAN 


As I have before said, I wish to interest the 
sportsman in this book more than any other one 
class of individuals, for I think it is to him, largely, 
that we must look in the future for a large per- 
centage of the pictures which we will get of ani- 
mal life, especially of the larger mammals: the 
deer, moose, caribou, elk, bear, wildcat, etc. 

By sportsmen I mean, not those men who 
shoot from the pure love of killing something, 
and whose sole ambition is to kill as much as 
possible in a given length of time. They are the 
ones who helped to exterminate our buffalo, and 
who are now doing all they can to lessen the di- 
minishing numbers of the elk and caribou still in 
this country; who find pleasure in standing on 
the deck of a Florida river boat and shooting 
the alligators and any other wild life they may 
see on the shore as the boat passes; and who 
would as soon shoot a grouse or a woodcock on 
its nest as flying. They have none of the true 
sportsman’s blood in them and are, consequently, 

19 


20 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


undeserving of the name; and they could find 
but little to interest them in work with a camera 
unless they could find it useful in helping them 
to prove how many ducks or grouse they had 
killed in a day, or how many trout they had taken 
from a single brook. 

But I am writing to those true sportsmen who 
go to the wilds for the love of it and of the free, 
untrammelled life they can lead there; who know 
their wild brethren and appreciate their right to 
live sufficiently to give them, at least, a fighting 
chance; who carry their gun or rod, and use it 
for the pleasure it affords them to pit their 
strength, endurance, and ingenuity against the 
cunning and ofttimes greater strength of their 
quarry; and who, when they have won, and the 
beast, bird, or fish, as the case may be, falls to 
their prowess, feel elated, not at the fact that they 
have taken a life, but that, by their perseverance 
and superior skill, they have been able to gain 
the victory over their opponent. 

For these men, I say, I am in particular pre- 
paring this book, for they are the men who find 
a greater pleasure in winning a three or four 
hours’ hard-fought battle with a tarpon than if 
the same fight had been won with greater ease 
in less time, and who think a week or two not 
wasted if it only brings to them one splendid pair 
of moose antlers. I think that these same men 


Photography and the Sportsman 21 


could find a similar pleasure in working equally 
hard for like results with a camera, and I am 
sure if they could once be induced to try it that 
they would agree with me when I say that so far 
as excitement is concerned the sports are about 
equal, or, if anything, the advantage lies with the 
camera. 

Nowadays, in our hunting with a camera, the 
continued life of the animal we are after is an 
absolute necessity to the successful outcome of 
our quest, and he who would be in the fore ranks 
of the sportsman photographers must be ready to 
follow and photograph the moose and panther at 
bay and even the rattlesnake coiled for a strike. 
Does it not require a greater amount of courage 
to face an angry mountain hon with a camera 
than with a Winchester .30-—.40? I think it does. 
And he who is equal to the nerve and endurance 
testing stalk of a deer in order to photograph 
it can, in my mind, lay claim to being a truer 
hunter and sportsman than he who would shoot 
that same deer from a distance three or four times 
as great. So I will unhesitatingly say, that to 
any one who follows the chase for the mere excite- 
ment that it affords, the camera can offer far 
greater advantages for attaining his object than 
can the rifle. 

Let me quote from one of these men who was 
at all times an ardent lover of nature and a sports- 


22 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


man: “As a one-time sportsman who yielded to 
none in his enjoyment of the chase I can affirm 
‘that there is a fascination about the hunting of 
wild animals with a camera as far ahead of the 
pleasure to be derived from their pursuit with 
shot-gun or rifle as the sport found in shooting 
‘quail is beyond that of breaking clay pigeons. 
Continuing the comparison, from a sportsmans’ 
standpoint, hunting with the camera is the high- 
est development of man’s inherent love of the 
chase. 

“The killing of a bird with a gun seems little 
short of murder after one has attempted to cap- 
ture its image witha lens. The demands on the 
skill and patience of the bird photographer are 
endless, and his pleasure is intensified in propor- 
tion to the nature of the difficulties to be overcome, 
and in the event of success it is perpetuated by 
the infinitely more satisfactory results obtained. 
He does not rejoice over a bag of mutilated flesh 
and feathers, but in the possession of a trophy — 
an eloquent token of his prowess as a hunter, a 
talisman which holds the power of revivifying the 
circumstances attending its acquisition. 

“What mental vision of falling birds can be as 
potent as the actual picture of living birds in their 
homes? And how immeasurably one’s memories 
are brightened by the fact that this is not a picture 
of what has been, but of what is! 


Photography and the Sportsman 23 


“The camera thus opens the door to a field of 
sport previously closed to those who love the 
birds too much to find pleasure in killing them; 
to whom Bob White’s ringing whistle does not 
give rise to murderous speculation as to the num- 
ber of his family, but to an echo of the season’s 
joy which his note voices. They therefore have a 
new incentive to take them out of doors; for how- 
ever much we love nature for nature’s sake there 
are few of us whose pleasure in an outing is 
not intensified by securing some definite, lasting 
result.” 

All this from a man who once would shoot with 
the best, but who has now forsworn the use of 
the gun except when occasion demands it, and 
who finds his pleasure and recreation in hunting 
with a camera solely. That there are many others 
who think and feel the same way is evidenced by 
the number of ardent sportsmen who are taking 
up the camera in preference to the gun. 

One man, whom I have previously mentioned 
as being one of the first to see the possibilities in 
nature photography, had been up to that time 
through all his previous life a most active advo- 
cate of sports afield with shot-gun, rifle, and rod. 
There was seldom a season passed that he did not 
take month’s long hunting trips, but now that 
hunting is done entirely with a camera, for he has 
almost forsworn the use of any other weapon. 


24 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


Even so great a lover of the sport of hunting 
as Theodore Roosevelt said, in his introduction 
to A. G. Wallihan’s “ Camera Shots at Big Game,” 
that: “ The shot is, after all, only a small part of 
the free life of the wilderness. The chief attrac- 
tions lie in the physical hardihood for which the 
life calls, the sense of limitless freedom which it 
brings, and the remoteness and wild charm and 
beauty of primitive nature. All of this we get 
exactly as much in hunting with the camera as in 
hunting with the rifle; and of the two the former 
is the kind of sport which calls for the high- 
est degree of skill, patience, resolution, and 
knowledge of the life history of the animal 
sought.” 

But it is not necessary for the sportsman to 
entirely give up hunting with a gun in order to 
do so with a camera. 

Iam not an advocate of a continual close season, 
nor do I wish to preach against the sports of the 
chase except to those who are mean-spirited 
enough not to see wherein the true sport lies and 
will shoot, indiscriminately, everything in sight. 

I am, preéminently, a naturalist, but I have 
enough of the sportsman’s instinct in me to 
keenly enjoy a day with the quails behind a pair 
of good dogs. I find much more real and lasting 
pleasure, however, in the use of my camera than 
of my gun. 


Photography and the Sportsman 25 


But why not combine the use of the two judi- 
ciously? It is an easy thing to do, and the two 
sports need not conflict with each other. Many 
sportsmen now carry small kodaks with them on 
their trips to the woods. These, while answer- 
ing some purposes, do not give as satisfactory re- 
sults as would a different camera better suited to 
the work; and it is my intention, in this volume, 
to give to the sportsman who wishes either to 
actually give up his gun for a camera or to com- 
bine the use of the two, full and explicit direc- 
tions, not only as to how he should use his outfit, 
but the best outfit for the different uses. 

He who does thus combine photographing 
with his other sports afield will find the pleasures 
of his outing doubled. He can bring home with 
him not only trophies in the way of antlers and 
skins, but also pictures of the game he was seek- 
ing, taken in their native haunts. He can make 
photographs of his companion, for few travel 
alone, capturing the prize fish of the trip, for it is 
entirely possible to photograph jumping fish, pro- 
vided one has the proper outfit and is quick 
enough. He can have innumerable mementos 
that will prove a lasting pleasure, and which, dur- 
ing the months that he must spend in the city or 
town, will serve to take him back in memory, 
away from the haunts of men, to the woods; 
and he can, while looking over them, live again 


26 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


the moment when, after patient waiting, he at 
last secured the picture that he sought. 

And what of the skill required for camera hunt- 
ing? Does that count for nothing? We must 
realize that in order to make successful pictures 
of the game we are stalking we must approach it 
much nearer than would be necessary if using a 
gun and one must, obviously, be a much more 
skilful hunter to be entirely successful in this 
new style of hunting. Every device and precau- 
tion known to the hunter is called into requisi- 
tion. It will often be found not only advisable, 
but necessary, to seek the most advantageous 
position, and, after it is found, to wait, sometimes 
even for hours, until the subject presents itself in 
a suitable attitude. 

One could have the opportunity for a dozen or 
more shots with a gun at the game he is stalking 
before he is able to make one with his camera, 
and so it must be unquestioned that, so far as the 
chance for one to display his skill as a woodsman 
and hunter is concerned, hunting with a camera is 
far ahead of hunting with a gun. 

And to able-bodied, active men does this not 
afford greater opportunities for pleasure? Who 
is there that finds the greatest amount of enjoy- 
ment in the thing which is obtained through little 
or no real endeavor? But when we obtain an 
object by the surmounting of many real obstacles, 


Photography and the Sportsman 27 


when we have to bring into play all the skill and 
ingenuity we possess in order to gain our end, 
that end is worth the gaining, that object worth 
the having, and we would not exchange it for 
dozens of those reached through little effort. 

There are thousands of people who own cam- 
eras and who imagine they are finding pleasure 
in photographing such steadfast and patiently im- 
movable objects as houses, statues, bits of scenery, 
etc. What is the enjoyment of such compara- 
tively prosaic employment when the whole field 
of nature photography is open to any one who 
wishes to enter it, and when such successes as one 
may have are not only of real value in themselves, 
but are undeniable tributes to one’s skill both as 
a photographer and a hunter? 

Furthermore, the sportsman who hunts with a 
camera has the advantage over the man who does 
not in the fact that everything is “game” that 
comes his way. There is no bird or animal that 
is too small to be of interest photographically. 
He will find that even the flowers, the trees, the 
insects, and the thousand and one things which 
may be photographed in the woods are worth 
considering and not without their full quota of in- 
terest, and he will gradually learn how much more 
numerous are nature’s offspring than he has ever 
before considered them. 

Moreover, another thing that must be taken 


28 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


into consideration is the fact that there is no 
closed season for the camerist. Every month in 
the year is prolific with the wild life, and there is 
no time when one cannot obtain pictures of it. 
So we need not choose our time to go on a hunt- 
ing trip according to the game laws, but can start 
whenever the spirit moves us or the opportunity 
presents itself. 

Should the photographing of American game 
pall on one or become too tame a pastime, there 
is an immense field for work in other countries 
for any one who has the time, money, and ambi- 
tion to enter it. It would seem to me that if one 
is looking for true excitement, he could have his 
heart’s desire by taking his camera into the jun- 
gles of India or Africa. There would, of course, 
be more or less danger attending such an under- 
taking, but danger is one of the underlying essen- 
tials of excitement; and think of the results one 
could obtain ! 

This has been done to a small extent by one or 
two English sportsmen, but the photographs com- 
ing from that portion of the world are few and far 
between, and science needs more of them. 

However, there is an immense field to be cov- 
ered in America, for the good photographs of our 
native big game are still all too uncommon, and 
it is to the sportsmen that I look in the future to 
increase their numbers. 


CHAP EER 11] 
CAMERAS, LENSES, AND SHUTTERS 


In a letter written to his brother, in 1816, Niepce 
describes how he secured what was_ probably 
the first picture ever made with a camera. He 
says: “ My object glass being broken, and being 
no longer able to use my camera, I made an 
artificial eye with Isidore’s ring box, a little thing 
from sixteen to eighteen lines square.... I 
placed this little apparatus in my workroom, 
facing the open window, looking on to the pigeon 
house. I made the experiment in the way you 
are acquainted with, and I saw on the white 
paper the whole of the pigeon house seen from 
the window.” 

This tells, in a few words, the basic principles 
of a camera; for it is, in fact, nothing but a light- 
tight box so arranged that, only when the image 
is to be projected, a few rays may be admitted 
through one end, and they form the image of 
whatever object or objects we may be photograph- 
ing, on the ground glass at the other end. The 
very name “camera” means only a chamber or 
compartment. 

29 


30 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


The principles of the projecting of images of 
objects by means of light rays were known, how- 
ever, a long time before the camera was invented. 
About the middle of the sixteenth century an 
Italian by the name of Baptista Porta invented 
the “camera obscura,” which, as its name implies, 
was nothing more or less than a darkened room 
to which light was admitted only through a single 
small hole in the window shutter. We can any 
one of us easily repeat his experiments by tightly 
closing the windows of a room with dark shades 
and through one shade cutting a small hole. On 
the wall opposite this window hang a sheet, and, 
when the sun is shining, we can see a faint, in- 
verted image on the sheet of whatever the window 
may look out upon. It is inverted because the rays 
of light emanating from the bottom of the object 
looked upon pass upward at an angle, and, enter- 
ing through the hole in the shade, strike the sheet 
at its upper edge, and wzce versa. This is true 
also of the modern camera. Porta somewhat 
improved upon the primitive contrivance just 
described by placing a double convex glass lens 
in the aperture of the shutter, outside of which 
a mirror was placed to receive the rays of light 
and reflect them through the lens. The image 
upon the screen was thus made much brighter 
and more distinct, and was, moreover, shown in 
its natural, upright position. Crowds flocked to 


Cameras, Lenses, and Shutters 31 


his house every day to see these light-painted 
pictures, which were at first thought to be noth- 
ing short of marvellous. In a short time, how- 
ever, the camera obscura was made an adjunct of 
many country houses, taking the shape of a small, 
round house with a conical roof, in the centre of 
which the lens was placed. Slanting mirrors 
were so arranged as to reflect the light from 
surrounding objects on to a table in the centre of 
the room so that a reduced facsimile of the entire 
view to be seen from the roof top was reproduced 
on the table top. Its only disadvantage was the 
fact that the picture could never be changed 
except with the natural change of the seasons. 
Up to within a very few years such places were 
still in existence, and I am not sure that some of 
them cannot be found to this very day, if any- 
where, in some of the old country seats in Europe. 
The photographic camera of to-day is, in fact, 
nothing but a miniature camera obscura, for it is 
simply a box with a lens at one end and a ground 
glass screen, upon which the image is projected, 
at the other. A modern camera, that is made by 
any one of the numerous manufacturers in this 
and other countries who turn out first-class goods, 
is a veritable work of art. It is supplied with all 
the appliances for simplifying the labor of the 
operator and for producing absolutely the best 
results, and is correspondingly expensive. 


32 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


Cameras, broadly speaking, are of two classes: 
the camera which is heid in the hands during the 
exposure, with which only instantaneous expos- 
ures or “snap shots” can be made, and which is 
termed a “hand camera,” and the one that must 
be set upon a tripod in order to be used. 

Of the ordinary form of hand camera, the 
“press the button” type, I shall not speak, for 
they are of almost no use to the nature worker. 

There are two types of cameras in this class, 
however, that are the outcome of the almost con- 
tinuous experiments of the manufacturers in late 
years, and which have done more to revolutionize 
nature photography than any other appliance or 
appliances, and these, I think, are worthy of a few 
words. 

They are the “twin lens” and the “ reflex’ 
cameras. The twin lens was the first to be 
placed on the market, and it consisted of a 
“double-decker” box that was practically two 
cameras in one. There were two lenses, one 
above the other, of exactly the same focal length 
and attached to the same front board so that both 
could be racked out or in at the same time. The 
lower lens made the picture, and the upper lens 
acted as a view finder. At the back of this upper 
lens was a mirror, placed at such an angle that it 
reflected the image, thrown upon it by the lens, 
on to a ground glass which was set in the top 


oJ 


Cameras, Lenses, and Shutters 33 


of the camera. This was protected by a hood 
and was the exact size of the plate used in the 
camera, so that the operator, in looking at it, saw 
the image not only the exact size that it would 
be reproduced on the plate he was using, but also 
right side up; and, moreover, he could watch it 
up to the very instant of exposure. The focussing 
was accomplished by means of a thumb-screw on 
one side, while a button upon the other side, when 
pressed, released the shutter, if it was a focal plane, 
or, if the ordinary shutter was used, it could be 
released in the usual way by means of a bulb. 

The advantage of this camera over all the styles 
of tripod cameras lay in the fact that the plate- 
holder might be inserted, the slide drawn, and 
the shutter set, all in readiness for an exposure, 
before the focussing was done. One can readily 
see that, in photographing animate objects that 
are only too likely to move, and especially those 
that are already in motion, this was a great 
advantage, for there was none of the useless 
delay between the time of focussing and releas- 
ing the shutter that is necessary when using the 
ordinary tripod box; instead, the shutter could 
be released the instant that a sharp focus was 
obtained and one could be reasonably certain 
of having the image of the object he was attempt- 
ing to photograph on the plate. 

The only drawbacks. to this camera. were the 

D 


34 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


facts that the use of two lenses made it unneces- 
sarily expensive, while the increased size made it 
cumbersome and heavy. So the manufacturers 
set themselves to remedy these defects, and the 
result was the reflex camera, an instrument that 
no nature worker can afford to be without. Its 
principles are the same as were those of the twin 
lens, which it has practically superseded, with the 
exception that there is only one lens used by 
which both the focussing is done and the expos- 
ure made. This is accomplished by means of a 
mirror, placed between the lens and the plate, so 
arranged that, by pressing a button, a spring is 
released that throws it up and out of the way a 
fraction of a second previous to the release of the 
shutter. As it is obvious that the shutter must 
be back, and not in front, of this mirror, naturally 
the focal plane is the only one that can be used 
on this camera. 

It can easily be seen that this instrument has 
all of the advantages of the twin lens, together 
with some added virtues. With it pictures can 
be obtained with comparative ease that were, 
heretofore, thought to be entirely out of the 
question; and so much do I depend upon it in 
my work, that I should almost feel inclined to 
advise a man who could only afford one camera 
to get the reflex. 

When buying a camera, no matter of what type, 


Cameras, Lenses, and Shutters 35 


if we have never used one before, we had better 
let some one select our instrument that has some 
knowledge of them, and not depend upon the 
advice of the dealer. Afterward, we should be- 
come thoroughly acquainted with all its various 
movements and how they affect the image before 
we attempt to make any exposures with it, for by 
so doing we will find that we can work quicker 
and to better advantage when we do begin, and 
will make fewer failures in consequence. 

Tripod cameras are of two types: the long and 
the short focus, that is, those having a long exten- 
sion of bellows and those whose bellows are much 
shorter. For nature workers the former is the 
type that should always be used, as with it we are 
enabled to obtain a much larger image, in other 
words, work closer to our subject, than with the 
short focus camera. The ones that have an 
extension of bellows both at front and rear are 
the most convenient, as they allow of being fo- 
cussed either from the back or front as we please, 
besides being much more rigid than are those 
whose bellows extend only in the front. 

The swing-back is an essential feature of the 
modern camera. It is a device by which the 
back, holding the plate-holder, is allowed to swing, 
either vertically or horizontally, to a considerable 
angle. Let me explain the advantages of this 
contrivance. The nearer the camera is to an 


36 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


object, the greater must be the distance between 
the lens and the plate in order to have the image 
in sharp focus; and when the distance between 
the lens and the object is very short, say less than 
two feet, a small deviation in the distance between 
the lens and the plate suffices to entirely throw 
the image out of focus. Now, when the camera 
is pointing downward at any upright object, such 
as a growing flower or a bird’s nest in a low bush, 
as the camera must necessarily be tilted at a con- 
siderable angle, it is obvious that the plate cannot 
be parallel with the object if the back of the 
camera is rigid; and therefore if the top of the 
object is in focus, the bottom, being much farther 
away from the plate, will be out of focus, and wzce 
versa. ‘This defect can be corrected, to a large 
extent, by the proper use of the swing-back. It 
also prevents distortion of lines, which is bound 
to occur when the plate and the object being 
photographed are not parallel. This can best 
be illustrated by focussing the camera upon a 
tall building, where it is necessary to tilt the 
instrument up in order to include the top of the 
building. When this is done, it will be seen that 
the lines of the building in the image converge 
at the top, giving it the appearance of falling over. 
This is caused by the plate being tilted back, and 
the lines can be straightened by the use of the 
swing-back. If we ever try to use a camera that 


Cameras, Lenses, and Shutters 37 


is not fitted with one, after having become ac- 
customed to the use of it, we will discover what 
a really invaluable adjunct it is. 

Another very useful appliance is the rising and 
falling front, which, by changing the position of 
the lens, without changing the position of the 
camera, allows one to get more or less foreground, 
as he may desire, in his picture. 

When focussing upon an object that is near by, 
especially when we are trying to make it approxi- 
mately life-size, it is always best to do so with 
the back extension, leaving the front extension 
entirely alone. By doing so we do not change 
the distance between the lens and the object, and 
this is very important in such close work, for it 
is extremely difficult to obtain a perfect focus 
when in the very act of doing so we are con- 
stantly changing the point of focus. 

In order to take a picture it is not necessary to 
have a lens, that is if we are always photograph- 
ing stationary objects and the length of time that 
we have in which to make the exposure is not 
an important factor; but it is necessary to have 
one when we wish to do instantaneous work. 
A picture can be taken, however, by using a piece 
of black cardboard, or any other opaque substance, 
in the centre of which a pinhole has been made, 
and which is inserted in the place that is meant 
to be occupied by the lens. 


38 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


A lens does not form the image; the rays of 
light do that, and a pinhole will allow the rays of 
light to pass as well as will a lens. The lens, 
however, gathers together these rays and _ sifts 
them, discarding those that are not needed and 
allowing only those to pass which are necessary 
to the formation of the picture. 

If we wish to understand thoroughly the prin- 
ciples of a lens, and how it does its work, we 
must obtain some book, of which there are many 
published, upon this subject and read it, for here 
I shall only touch upon the more important points. 
In fact, I should advise the beginner to study some 
elementary work on optics as applied to photog- 
raphy, and also the elements of photographic chem- 
istry. He will find that the knowledge he will 
thus gain will cause him to work to much better 
advantage, and the time spent in studying these 
things will not by any means be lost. 

The modern double lens is made in two com- 
binations, that is, there are two sets of glass 
used in its construction, and, therefore, it is what 
is termed “convertible,” ze. each combination 
can be used separately, or the two can be used 
together, thus making, in reality, three lenses in 
one. 

The “focal length ” of a lens is, roughly speak- 
ing, the distance between it and the ground glass 
when an object at a distance is in focus, or, in 


Cameras, Lenses, and Shutters 39 


other words, when the lens is at what is ordinarily 
called “ universal focus.” 

Different lenses have different focal lengths, 
and, also, the different combinations of a double 
lens have different focal lengths (the single com- 
bination being, usually, twice the focal length of 
the double). The longer the focal length of a 
lens the larger will be the image of an object at 
a fixed distance. That is to say, if we make a 
photograph of an object at a certain distance with 
a lens of eight-inch focus, and then make another 
of the same object from the same distance with 
one of sixteen-inch focus, we will see that the 
image taken with the latter is double the size and 
covers four times the area of that taken with the 
former. This is due to a law of optics which there 
is no room here to explain; but it can be readily 
seen that, for nature workers, the lenses of the 
longer focal lengths are by far the best to use, if 
size of image is the only consideration. Unfortu- 
nately, there are other things to be considered, 
and one of these is the fact that, on the other 
hand, the longer the focus of the lens the less 
speed it has, for, while a lens of sixteen-inch focus 
admits just as much light as does one of eight- 
inch focus, in the former instance the light must 
cover four times the area of the latter, and there- 
fore the speed of the latter is, approximately, four 
times as great. 


40 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


The depth of focus of a lens is the distance that 
the ground glass can be moved to and fro with- 
out the image of the object upon which the lens 
is focussed becoming visibly unsharp. This per- 
missible racking increases correspondingly as the 
lens is stopped down. This term is often con- 
fused with depth of field, which is the distance 
between two objects lying in a straight line with 
the camera and which are at both extremes of the 
field of sharp focus. This also increases materially 
with each smaller stop used. 

The “stops” or “diaphragms” of a lens are 
used to increase sharpness of detail, depth of field, 
and depth of focus. These stops are simply a 
series of apertures of varying sizes, which are 
either made in a rotating plate, when they are 
known as “rotating stops”; or in separate plates 
which are slipped into the lens mount and are 
called “Waterhouse diaphragms” after the in- 
ventor; or, and this is the most usual form, the 
apertures are formed by a set of thin plates which 
open and close like the iris of the eye, and which, 
consequently, are called “iris diaphragms.” 

The most practical function of the diaphragm 
is that, by decreasing the aperture, various planes 
are brought equally into focus at the same time. 
This, necessarily, by lessening the illumination 
of the plate, increases the requisite length of 
exposure correspondingly with the diminishing 


Cameras, Lenses, and Shutters At 


of the size of the aperture. The stops of a lens 
are all numbered, and, speaking very roughly, the 
time of exposure must be doubled with each 
smaller stop used. That is to say, if one second 
is the proper exposure on a subject when the 
lens is wide open, then, when using the next 
smaller stop, two seconds must be given, and 
when the next smaller is used, four seconds, and 
so on. 

We can see by this that the larger the aperture 
of a lens the more speed it has, and by this means 
the speed of a lens is determined; but, also, with 
the larger apertures there is a corresponding 
diminishing of the depth of field. A lens work- 
ing at F-.6 (which means that its largest aperture 
is F.6) is twice as fast as one working at F.8, 
but its depth of field is diminished accordingly. 
However, by stopping it down to F.8 we have the 
same depth of field and the same speed as we 
would have with the one working at F.8 used 
wide open. 

The different systems of marking lenses are too 
intricate and would take up too much room for 
me to go into a detailed explanation of them here, 
nor do I think it at all necessary. Suffice it to 
say that the F. system is the one most generally 
used, and it represents the different aperture ratios 
and is intended to give the operator an idea of 
the relative speed of his lens when used at the 


42 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


different apertures. If he would learn more 
about it, and know exactly how each system is 
worked out, he can find it in one of the books on 
lenses of which I have already spoken. 

The angle of view of a lens is the diameter of 
the field that is sharply covered by that lens. 
There are narrow, medium, and wide angle 
lenses. The greater the focal length of a lens 
compared with the size of the plate the narrower 
the angle, but as any lens which will cover a 
large plate will cover a smaller one —the greater 
includes the less —and as many lenses when 
stopped down will cover a much larger plate than 
when at full opening, there is only one way in 
which we can call lenses wide or narrow angle. 
There are lenses which will only cover a plate at 
a certain narrow angle, and stopping down does 
not extend their fields. They are rightly called 
narrow angle lenses. There are other lenses 
which will work at a very wide angle, covering 
a plate sharply from corner to corner at an angle 
of ninety degrees and even more. All lenses will 
not do this, and therefore those that will are cor- 
rectly called wide angle. To a nature worker a 
wide angle lens is seldom necessary, although 
sometimes extremely useful. 

In choosing a lens for nature work we must 
be governed principally by two considerations: 
speed and focal length. Lenses vary in price 


Cameras, Lenses, and Shutters 43 


from those that cost less than a dollar and are 
put in the very cheapest of cameras, to those 
that cost up in the hundreds. If we can afford 
it, it is well to have more than one lens, even 
though we are doing all our work on the same 
size plate with the same camera. We should 
have one lens that will work very rapidly, for use 
where we are willing to sacrifice depth of field and 
focal length to speed. We should have another 
for use where depth of field and focal length are 
necessary; and we should, without question, have 
a telephoto, of which I shall speak at length in 
another chapter. 

It is always a good plan, when buying a lens, 
to get one that is made to cover a plate one size 
larger than the one we intend to use, as by so 
doing we acquire greater focal length and greater 
illumination of the plate, which necessarily gives 
greater speed than will the same style of lens one 
size smaller. 

An anastigmatic lens is always preferable to the 
cheaper rapid rectilinear. The advantages of the 
former over the latter are: rapidity, extremely 
fine definition over a very large flat field at a 
large aperture, portability, and freedom from as- 
tigmatism. The great covering power of the 
anastigmat is an immense advantage alone. The 
front of the camera may be raised to any extent 
that the camera will allow, without fear of leaving 


44 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


the bottom of the plate uncovered or out of focus; 
and the lens can be used to include a very wide 
angle on a larger plate than the one it is really 
intended to cover. 

In nature work the entire success of a pic- 
ture depends upon the sharpness of focus that is 
obtained. There must be no diffusion of detail 
in any part of the main object, and as much of 
the surroundings as possible should be in sharp 
focus also. It is therefore obvious that we should 
pay particular attention to how we focus our lens. 
As has been before stated, objects at different 
distances from the camera may be brought into 
equally sharp focus by stopping down if there is 
not too great a distance between them. One of 
the first things a beginner will observe, when he 
is trying to photograph an object that is very near 
to the camera, is that the whole object cannot 
usually be rendered sharply with the lens at the 
full aperture. In these cases he must focus 
sharply upon the point nearest the camera, and 
then stop down until all is brought into the 
field of sharp focus and make his exposure 
accordingly. 

In the care of lenses one cannot be too particu- 
lar. They are expensive articles, for they are made 
by the very highest class of skilled labor. They 
are easily damaged and should be treated accord- 
ingly. They should be kept as free from dust, 


Cameras, Lenses, and Shutters AS 


dirt of any kind, and grease as possible; and in 
handling them the fingers should never be al- 
lowed to come into contact with the surfaces of 
the glass. When cleaning them, which should 
be frequently done, never use anything that is at 
all rough, for the glass of which a lens is made 
is comparatively soft and, consequently, easily 
scratched. Chamois is not a good thing to use. 
An old piece of silk or very soft old linen or 
muslin is good, but better still is the soft paper 
that is manufactured expressly for this purpose, 
and which can be obtained from any dealer in 
optical goods. The paper from which Chinese 
napkins is made is also good. 

In cleaning a lens do not scrub it as you would 
a window pane, but rub it very gently with a 
circular movement around the lens. If there is a 
dirt spot that cannot be removed by simply rub- 
bing, then either breathe gently upon it, or use a 
drop of alcohol, which must immediately be dried 
off. On no account ever apply water, ammonia, 
or any chemicals. 

Lenses deteriorate with age, especially when 
left exposed to the light or air, and so they should 
be protected as much as possible. Chamois bags 
or round cardboard boxes are good receptacles for 
them, and, when they are out of the camera, they 
should always be capped at both ends. 

In fitting a flange to the front board, one should 


46 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


be very careful that it fits perfectly tight, with no 
possible chance for the admission of light. Also, 
in screwing the lens into the flange, there is a 
right and a wrong way, as one writer puts it. He 
says: “The right way is first to turn the tube 
backward — ze. the wrong way of the thread — 
until the two click at the point where the threads 
meet. Then reverse the movement, and the lens 
will enter its flange quite easily.” 

If a lens sticks in its tube or flange, it is my 
advice not to attempt to force it out by the use 
of a vice or any other means, but take it to the 
maker, who has the proper appliances and knows 
how to do it, and who will not injure it as you 
would be very likely to do. 

Finally, before buying a lens, first test it. 
The dealers will generally allow this, and if you 
do not understand how to do it yourself, you had 
best ask some one to do it for you who is well 
acquainted with the different lenses. 

Of shutters there is really little to be said, as 
they are not complex and should be easily under- 
stood by the average amateur. They can be 
roughly divided into two classes: the diaphragm 
shutter and the focal plane. The former is usu- 
ally fitted between the two combinations of the 
doublet or in front of a single lens and is made 
to give, automatically, exposures ranging from 
to Of a second, in the best ones, to three min- 


Cameras, Lenses, and Shutters 47 


utes, and is also capable of being left open in 
order to give an exposure of any length of time 
that is required. As I have said elsewhere, the 
time marks on a shutter should never be abso- 
lutely relied upon, as they are put there more to 
aid us in judging the differences rather than the 
absolute measurements of time. 

The focal plane shutter is one that, as its name 
implies, works on a plane. It is composed of a 
black curtain that crosses in front of the plate. 
This curtain is divided in the centre bya slit that 
can be made wider or narrower at the will of the 
operator, and as this slit is the entire width of 
the plate and exposes in its passage only one sec- 
tion of the plate at a time, we are enabled by the 
use of this shutter to get the greatest amount of 
illumination in the shortest space of time. This 
shutter is capable of being worked automatically 
and with almost absolute exactness, giving ex- 
posures ranging from about 7/5 to zgpp of a sec- 
ond. Obviously, for very rapid work it is the 
only one that can be used. 

No matter what style of shutter we are using, 
we should learn to know it and its capabilities 
thoroughly, and be able to judge quickly and 
accurately how to set it for any given exposure, 
so that as little time may be lost in manipula- 
tion of the shutter as possible, for in nature 
work time is very valuable, and the quicker we 


48 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


can do things the greater the chances of our 
obtaining the picture we are after. 

Shutters, as well as lenses, should be well cared 
for, as dust or dirt of any kind or the least rust 
will cause them to work slower or sometimes 
to refuse to work altogether. In fact, we cannot 
well afford to ill-treat any of our photographic 
outfit, for the better it is cared for the longer it 
will last and the better the work it will do for us. 


CHAPTER IV 
THE DARK ROOM: DEVELOPING AND PRINTING 


PLATE-HOLDERS may be loaded and the plates 
developed in almost any place, from a small, dark 
closet to a sleeping bag, but that is no reason 
why we should not, when we can, have a comfort- 
able place for a dark room. This need not be 
large. All the space that is absolutely necessary 
is enough for a chair and a table, but in order 
that we may work in entire comfort it should be 
at least five feet square. 

In making this room the one thing to be most 
particular about is the temperature. Coolness is 
a great consideration, both as regards our own 
personal comfort and the welfare of the plates. 
Therefore, if we happen to have a dry cellar be- 
neath our house, that is the best possible place 
for the dark room, as it is likely to be fairly cool 
in the summer and also fairly warm in winter. 

Any carpenter can build this room at a very 
small cost, or if we have the time, we can do so 
ourselves even cheaper. It should be made 
of half or three quarter inch pine boards, and 

B 49 


50 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


these should be dovetailed so as to leave no 
cracks through which any daylight may creep. 
If our house is wired for electricity, it is easy to 
run a wire to this room, and it makes by far the 
best light, as it is steady and gives less heat than 
any other. Otherwise we can get our light by 
cutting a square hole in one side of the room and 
placing a lamp upon a bracket outside of the 
hole. This hole should be covered with several 
thicknesses of ruby cloth and orange paper, for 
the least white ray in the light that strikes the 
plate will inevitably fog it. The light, by this 
arrangement, will be sufficiently strong for all 
practical purposes, and by keeping the lamp out- 
side it will not heat the room as it would were it 
inside. 

If we can have running water in the room we 
will find it a great convenience, but it is not nec- 
essary. <A plentiful supply of water, however, is 
requisite in order that we may have entire cleanli- 
ness in our work. 

The shelves inside the room should be so ar- 
ranged that we may have everything within easy 
reach without moving from our seat, for it is often 
necessary to work quickly when developing a 
plate. It is well, therefore, to have one shelf for 
the trays and another for the chemicals on the left- 
hand side; one, which should always be kept per- 
fectly dry and free from dirt of any kind, on the 


The Dark Room: Developing and Printing 51 


right-hand side for changing the plates; and the 
long shelf or table beneath the window on which 
to do the developing. If a second shelf is placed 
below this last one, on which to put the hypo tray, 
it will materially lessen the chances of any of the 
hypo spattering into the developer. Over the 
window there should be a curtain of very dark 
red cloth which may be raised to get all the light 
necessary when using the ordinary plate, but which 
can be lowered to give less light when the ortho- 
chromatic plate is being developed, for this plate, 
being sensitive to the red rays, must be exposed 
to the light as little as possible. 

Many people who will read this book are 
undoubtedly already adepts at developing and 
printing, and so this chapter will be of little or no 
use to them; but to the beginner, who has never 
done any work in photography, a few words of 
advice in the manipulation of his plates, both in 
development and printing, may not come amiss. 

In the first place, cleanliness is absolutely essen- 
tial to good work in photography, and on this 
point one cannot be too particular. The plate- 
holders and camera should be kept free from 
dust, and the plates should be dusted with a soft 
camel’s-hair brush both before placing them in 
the holders and after taking them out, before 
development. If this is not done, “pinholes” in 
the negative are apt to be the result. These are 


52 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


minute transparent spots caused by dust on the 
plates either when the exposure was made or 
during the development. 

Another thing that we must be careful to avoid 
is air bubbles on the plate during development, 
for these will also cause transparent spots. The 
developer should be flowed over the plate quickly 
and evenly, and the tray must be constantly rocked 
until the development is completed. It is even 
a good plan to pass a wad of absorbent cotton 
over the face of the negative, after it has been 
immersed, to break any bubbles that may have 
formed upon it, for these sometimes will not 
break simply by the action of rocking the tray. 

After development the plate should be rinsed 
in clear water before being placed in the hypo. 
This is not absolutely necessary, but will some- 
times prevent staining. It should be allowed to 
remain in the hypo bath until it is thoroughly 
fixed, for a plate insufficiently fixed will invariably 
show stains sooner or later, and these stains can- 
not be removed. Therefore it is always best to 
leave the plate in the hypo for several minutes 
after it has the appearance of being completely 
fixed. The double-coated or non-halation plates 
take much longer to fix out than do the ordinary 
ones, and therefore extra care should be taken 
with them in this respect. An old hypo bath that 
has turned yellow should never be used, as its 


Tbe Dark Rocm: Developing and Printing 53 


action is slow and it is liable to stain the plates. 
In the winter a plain hypo bath of one part hypo 
to four or five parts water may be used, but this 
should be made fresh every day. In the summer 
the acid bath should be used. This is made by 
adding two hundred grains of acetone sulphite 
to every quart of a twenty per cent solution of 
hypo. There are many other formulas for acid 
fixing baths, but I have found this one to be the 
simplest and best. It not only hardens the film 
of the plate sufficiently to prevent it from “ frill- 
ing” or “blistering” (which is the object of the 
acid bath, for plates will invariably do this in the 
warm weather if they are not hardened), but it 
clears the plate perfectly and will keep in good 
condition for an almost indefinite period. 
Another good hardener is formaline (use one 
part to about thirty parts of water), but its only 
bad feature is the fact that if we are not very 
careful it is likely to harden the film so much 
that it will be impossible to either reduce or in- 
tensify it afterward should we so desire. The 
plate should be placed in this solution immedi- 
ately after being taken from the hypo (of course 
when using this the acid bath is unnecessary) and 
allowed to remain in it from one-half a minute te 
three minutes according to the strength of the 
solution. This solution will keep well and may 
be used repeatedly until it becomes too weak. 


54 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


Should it become discolored, it will not injure the 
negative. 

A negative should always be well washed in 
running water for at least an hour, for it is im- 
portant that all traces of hypo be eliminated from 
it. If we have not running water, then the time 
of washing should be at least doubled and the 
water changed at least seven or eight times. 
After washing it should be placed to dry in some 
place where there is a free passage of air and as 
little dust as possible, and the more quickly it 
dries the better. 

As to the best developer to use, this is entirely a 
matter of opinion. There are many different ones 
on the market, and all are equally good if they are 
properly used. The pyro developer is the oldest 
and probably the most universally used at present. 
Its only defect is the fact that it will stain the 
fingers very badly and often the negative as well, 
although this stain can be removed from the 
fingers; and, if it is equally distributed over the 
negative, it does not destroy its printing qualities. 
When one is well acquainted with this developer, 
he will find that he will be enabled to obtain any 
quality of negative with it that he desires. It is 
really an excellently good developer for all around 
work. It is somewhat slow in its action, but this 
is in its favor rather than against it, as it gives 
one ample time for the manipulation of his plate 


The Dark Room: Developing and Printing 55 


and allows him to develop it more exactly in 
accordance with the exposure. 

A good formula, that produces vigorous nega- 
tives, is made up in two solutions, as follows: 
No. 1. Dissolve 24 ounces sulphite of soda, crys- 
tals, and 14 ounces carbonate of soda, crystals, in 
15 ounces of water. No.2. Dissolve 8 grains 
oxalic acid in 12 ounces of water and add 4 ounce 
of pyro. To develop, take 1 ounce of No. 1,4 
an ounce of No. 2, and add 3 ounces of water. 
Another good formula is: No. 1. Water 16 
ounces; sulphite of soda, crystals, 4 ounces; car- 
bonate of potash, dry, 4 ounce. No. 2. Dis- 
solve 8 grains oxalic acid in 12 ounces of water 
and add 4 ounce of pyro. For use take } ounce 
of No. 1, 2 drams of No. 2, and add 14 to 3 ounces 
of water according to whether the negative be 
over or under exposed. If the latter, the most 
water should be used; if the former, the least. 
With a normal exposure about 2 to 2} ounces of 
water should be used. 

Of all the new developers that have been placed 
on the market in late years, metol has probably 
found the greatest favor. It is a very rapid de- 
veloper, causing the image to appear, on a nor- 
mally exposed plate, in from three to six seconds, 
and the entire development should be accom- 
plished in from one and a half to two minutes. 
For soft effects it is excellent, giving plenty of 


56 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


detail without any hardness, provided the plate 
has been properly exposed. 

It should be made up in two solutions, as then 
it will keep longer than when made in one. A 
good formula is as follows: No.1. Water, 16 
ounces; metol, + ounce; when thoroughly dis- 
solved, add 24 ounces sulphite of soda, crystals. 
No. 2. Water, 16 ounces; carbonate of potassium, 
14 ounces; bromide of potassium, 10 grains. For 
a normal exposure take 1 ounce of No. 1, 4 ounce 
of No. 2, and add 14 ounces of water. In dealing 
with over exposure the amount of No. 2 should 
be decreased and a slightly larger amount of No. 1 
used with a few drops of a ten per cent solution 
of bromide potassium added. For under exposure 
use + ounce of No. 1, $ ounce of No. 2, and 14 
ounces of water. 

The characteristics of a metol-developed nega- 
tive are softness and “ thinness”; in other words, it 
is hard to get density. The development should 
always be carried much farther than what looks, 
by transmitted light, to be correct, for the density 
loses considerably in fixing. With pyro it loses 
but little, and therefore the development, when 
using pyro, should be carried but little beyond 
what seems to be the proper density for the fin- 
ished negative. 

This question of how far to carry a negative in 
development is one that everybody must learn for 


The Dark Room: Developing and Printing 57 


themselves by experience, for it is one where our 
own judgment alone can aid us. With different 
developers the negative requires to be carried to 
different degrees of density before being placed 
in the hypo bath. The only advice that can be 
offered upon the subject is, no matter what de- 
veloper you are using, always to make the image 
somewhat denser than would appear to be neces- 
sary by looking at it in the dark room. 

For myself, I prefer, for most work, metol used 
in conjunction with hydrokinone, for, as metol 
is a soft working developer, and hydrokinone 
gives hard results, the combination of the two 
strikes a happy medium that produces a brilliant, 
snappy negative that is full of half-tones and de- 
tail. The following is an excellent formula, sim- 
ple and efficient: Water, 16 ounces; metol, 45 
grains; hydrokinone, 90 grains; sulphite of soda, 
crystals, 2 ounces; carbonate of soda, 2 ounces. 
Dissolve in the order given and use, for normal 
exposures, I ounce of the solution to 4 of water. 
If the exposure is uncertain, use 10 ounces of 
water, and when the detail appears in the plate 
throw off this developer and finish with the 
normal mixture. This developer may be used 
repeatedly until its action becomes too slow, 
when it must be discarded, or it will be liable to 
stain the negative. It gives clear negatives with 
no trace of fog, if used properly, and is, in my 


58 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


opinion, by far the best developer for general 
work. 

There are many other developers on the market, 
all good, but it is unnecessary to enumerate them 
here. 

We should always have a bottle of a ten per 
cent solution of bromide of potassium in the dark 
room for use in cases of over exposure, for a few 
drops added to any developer acts as a retarder. 

In development we should always watch the 
negative carefully. It is well to have two strengths 
of developer mixed ready for use, one normal and 
the other much weaker. Commence development 
with the weak solution, and if the image appears 
too quickly and has a tendency toward “ flatness,” 
then the plate has been overexposed and must be 
treated accordingly by using the normal developer 
with some of the bromide solution added to it. If 
the image, on the other hand, comes up very 
slowly and has the appearance of being spotty 
and “hard,” then it has been underexposed and 
the developer must be weakened still more and no 
bromide added. This will bring out what detail 
there may be in the plate, but, of course, if it has 
been very badly underexposed, nothing can be 
done with it. 

If we know that a plate is very badly over- 
exposed, before we commence development, it can 
often be saved by first soaking it in water to which 


The Dark Room: Developing and Printing 59 


has been added about a dram of the bromide solu- 
tion and then developing it in a developer strong 
with bromide. The development of an overex- 
posed plate must be carried much farther than 
when the exposure is normal, otherwise the result 
will be flat with no contrasts. 

For normal or under exposures tank develop- 
ment is an excellent method. This consists in 
placing the plates in a covered tank of developer 
and allowing them to remain there until com- 
pletely developed. The hard rubber tanks are the 
best, but much more expensive than are those 
made of composition. I should recommend that 
metal tanks never be used. The developer should 
be diluted with about twenty times the amount of 
water used for normal development, and _ this 
should develop a correctly exposed plate in about 
an hour. The tank should be thoroughly washed 
before being used, and sufficient developer placed 
in it to completely cover the plates. The plates 
should not be placed so close together that they 
cannot be removed with perfect ease, and they 
should be handled very little or none at all during 
the process of development. 

If a negative is too dense, from over exposure 
or over development, it can be reduced after being 
fixed by placing it in a weak hypo bath to which 
has been added enough red prussiate of potash to 
turn it to a lemon-yellow. The tray should be 


60 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


rocked constantly during this process, else the 
reduction will be uneven, and the negative ex- 
amined frequently until the desired density is 
reached, otherwise it may be carried too far and 
made too thin. 

Negatives can be thus reduced after having 
been dried, but should then first be soaked in 
water until the film is perfectly softened. This 
reducer should only be used when the density is 
equal over the entire plate. When this is not so, 
that is, when some portions of the negative are 
much denser than others, causing that portion to 
print out white, with a loss of detail, then it can 
be reduced to an equal density by placing it in a 
three per cent solution of persulphate of ammo- 
nia. The negative must be closely watched, for 
this reducer acts very quickly after it once starts; 
and when it has been sufficiently reduced it must 
be placed immediately in a ten per cent solution 
of sulphite of soda and allowed to remain in it for 
five or ten minutes. This stops the action of the 
reducer, which would otherwise continue even 
after the negative had been placed in water. 
After reducing a negative in either solution, it 
should be thoroughly washed in running water. 
The last solution should never be used except 
after all traces of hypo have been eliminated 
from the negative, for, if there is any hypo 
in the film, stains will occur. Neither of the 


The Dark Room: Developing and Printing 61 


solutions will act upon a very much hardened 
film. 

When the negative is too thin from under 
development or under exposure it may be inten- 
sified, but not until after it has been thoroughly 
washed. The Agfa intensifier, which comes al- 
ready prepared, is the most convenient and gives 
as good results as any. Intensification can be 
carried as far as desired and a negative may be 
reintensified several times, but it must be entirely 
free from hypo, or else again we will have result- 
ing stains. Where there is a loss of detail from 
under exposure, if it cannot be brought out by 
developing in a weak developer, then intensifica- 
tion will do no good but only serve to make it 
harder. We can bring out what is in a negative 
and force it up to a good printing quality, but we 
cannot put into it what is not already there. 

Of the local manipulation of plates in develop- 
ment, reduction, and intensification, I shall say 
nothing, as the nature photographer will have 
but little recourse to this, and when he does the 
knowledge of how to do it will best come to him 
through experience. In fact, in all the processes 
of photography a little of this kind of knowledge 
is worth much advice. 

Great care should be exercised in the develop- 
ment of the orthochromatic plates, especially the 
fast ones, to expose them to even the ruby light 


62 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


as little as possible. I usually develop them in a 
covered tray if I am not using the tank. All 
plates should be handled during development 
very little and should be taken from the tray and 
held up to the light only when we think that de- 
velopment is nearing completion. 

In printing we come to the final process of 
photography, and much may be done in the way 
of improving a bad picture by manipulation of 
the various printing processes. The knowledge 
of how this can best be done is, however, only 
gained after much practice. 

I should advise the beginner to try the use of 
but one or two papers at the start and thoroughly 
acquaint himself with the working of these before 
he ventures to try his hand at the others. The 
two papers that are almost indispensable to all 
workers are the silver printing-out paper and 
velox. Of the printing-out papers (so named 
from the fact that the image shows while print- 
ing) there are many varieties, but the process of 
working them is the same in every case. They 
are the best for use with strong negatives, while 
the velox papers give better results when the 
negative is at all weak or thin. 

Directions for the use of the latter paper are 
enclosed in all packages, so it is a useless waste 
of space to repeat them here. 

With any of the silver papers the print must 


The Dark Room: Developing and Printing 63 


be made several shades darker than we wish the 
finished picture, for it will fade in the toning 
bath. For toning we can use any of the double 
or single toning solutions sold by dealers, but the 
best of them are more or less unreliable. We had 
much better buy the chloride of gold and make 
our own bath. The one that I have used for 
years and found eminently satisfactory is as 
follows: Bicarbonate of soda, 4 grains; gold, 4 
grain; water, 16 ounces. 

The prints should first be washed in five or six 
changes of water or in running water for fifteen 
or twenty minutes, to remove all the free silver. 
They should then be transferred directly to the 
toning bath, and while in this they should be con- 
stantly moved until the required tone is reached, 
when they should be placed in a weak hypo and 
alum bath. In this they should be allowed to 
remain for ten or fifteen minutes and then washed 
in running water for at least half an hour. 

For reproduction purposes glossy prints are 
required by most publishers, and for this the silver 
paper is by far the best. The gloss may be 
obtained either by burnishing them, on a machine 
made expressly for that purpose, after they have 
been mounted, or by “squeegeeing” them to a 
ferrotype board. The boards must be kept per- 
fectly clean and free from scratches, otherwise the 
prints will stick to them. 


64 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


Direct enlargements from the negatives upon 
bromide paper are easy to make if we have the 
proper appliances. We must have a dark room 
for this purpose fitted with a specially arranged 
camera, and the source of light must be either 
daylight or electric light (gas or lamplight is not 
strong enough). I cannot now go into a detailed 
account of this process, as it would necessitate a 
small volume to properly describe it and the nec- 
essary apparatus. For those who wish to use it, 
however, I should advise the perusal of “ Photo- 
Miniature,” No. 16, published by Tennant and 
Ward, 289 Fourth Avenue, New York City, for 
it gives full and explicit directions much better 
than could I. 

For making enlarged negatives an enlarging 
camera is necessary, and we must first make a 
positive on glass or celluloid and the enlarged 
negative from that. 

There are many occasions that arise where the 
background of a picture is bad and we wish to 
eliminate it while preserving the image of the 
main object. There are two ways of accomplish- 
ing this. The simplest is to make a dead-white 
background by “stopping out” all but the image 
we wish to preserve. This is done by painting 
out the entire background with a preparation 
which is known as “opaque.” One’s hand must 
needs be very steady to do this successfully 


The Dark Room: Developing and Printing 65 


and preserve the perfect outline of the main 
object. 

If we wish a background other than the one 
that is in the original negative, we can obtain it 
by what is known as double printing. To do 
this we must have two negatives, the one we have 
already stopped out for the main object and an- 
other one for the background, and the two must 
be in exact proportion to each other. A print 
must first be made of the figure on the opaqued 
negative and this print carefully cut out (the out- 
line must be followed exactly). This cut-out is 
then placed against the background negative, in 
the exact position in which we wish the figure to 
appear, and a print, of the depth which we wish 
it to be for toning, made from that negative. 
This will, naturally, show a white space of the 
exact size and form of the figure, or whatever the 
main object that we are using may be. Against 
this the figure in the opaqued negative must be 
fitted carefully, so that no sign of the joining will 
show, and allowed to print into the depth of the 
background. This is really not so difficult or 
tedious a process as it might seem and gives some 
very excellent results when used judiciously; but 
it should only be resorted to when absolutely nec- 
essary, for it is one of the methods of “faking” 
which all nature photographers should avoid 


when possible. 
F 


66 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


Retouching and “spotting out,” both on nega- 
tive and print, are ofttimes necessary, for pin- 
holes will come despite all our precautions, and 
often details can be worked up and better pic- 
tures thus obtained. Especially is this so where 
prints are being made for reproduction, for here 
they must be as clear and full of detail as possible; 
and where the negative has not got these quali- 
ties in it, it is obvious, if we would use it, that we 
must put them there in some way. 

In retouching the negative it must first be 
covered with a preparation of balsam known 
as a “retouching fluid,” which can be bought 
already prepared at any supply store. Without 
this the pencil will not make sufficiently heavy 
marks on the film to be of any material use. 
When the work is delicate, such as touching up 
the feathers of a bird or the fur of an animal, a 
very hard pencil (about six H) should be used, 
and this should be sharpened to a very fine point 
and never allowed to become in the least dull. 
For coarser work, such as filling in shadows, etc., 
a softer pencil can be used. All this retouching 
should be done with the utmost care in order that 
it may not show for what it is in the print. If 
it is done hurriedly or carelessly, it will inevitably 
show and spoil the photographic qualities of the 
print. If there is a heavy background or very 
deep shadows that should be held back or light- 


The Dark Room: Developing and Printing 67 


ened, this can be done by a wash of paint (either 
blue or yellow) on the back of the negative. 

Spotting out simply consists of filling in the 
transparent spots caused by specks of dust or 
bubbles in the developer. This may be done 
with opaque, water colors, or India ink. 

In working upon the print itself, if it is ona 
matt surface paper (such as platinum, velox, etc.), 
we should use either the soft, dull pencils, known 
to artists as the “negro pencil,” or else India ink 
applied with a fine brush. For work on the 
glossy prints, water colors mixed with a little 
gum arabic will give good results. 

At times it will be found advisable to locally 
print some portion of the picture more than the 
rest. This can be accomplished by carefully 
shading the remainder of the negative with a 
piece of cardboard. It should not be held too 
close to the negative and should be slightly moved 
about during the time it is held there in order 
that no sharp line of demarcation may appear on 
the print. 

The keeping of a large collection of negatives 
is oftena problem. To repack them in the boxes 
in which the plates originally came only necessi- 
tates a useless expenditure of time in looking 
over them when any particular negative is wanted. 
I enclose each negative in an envelope, on the out- 
side of which I mark the number and name of the 


68 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


negative. These I pack upright, in numerical 
order, in long, lidless boxes which are just the 
width of the envelopes. These I put away on 
shelves just deep enough and high enough to re- 
ceive them, and in this manner I can store a large 
number of negatives in a comparatively small 
place and yet have easy access to any one that I 
may need. On the front of each box I have a 
label which tells me what subjects and what 
numbers that box contains, and, by the aid of my 
catalogue (and it is necessary for any one to keep 
a catalogue if he has a large number of negatives 
from which he is constantly working), I can get, 
without loss of time, any negative from which I 
wish to print. 

This also insures greater safety to the nega- 
tives, for it necessitates less handling of them. 
In all my photographic career I have broken, 
unintentionally, just three negatives, and I attrib- 
ute this largely to my method of keeping them. 

Necessarily, in the confined space of one chap- 
ter it is impossible to give, in full detail, all the 
various processes of developing, printing, etc. I 
have, however, attempted to give the more essen- 
tial details which a beginner should know, and 
the rest he must learn for himself. 

One last word of precaution. If you would 
succeed and turn out good work, you can never 
afford to be careless. Never work in a hurry, but 


The Dark Room: Developing and Printing 69 


always give yourself ample time for what you have 
to do. Mix your solutions with care and exact- 
ness, and unless your water supply is fairly pure, 
it should be distilled. After mixing a solution 
always filter before using it, for there is much dirt 
that remains in it that might injure the negative ; 
and, above all things, be cleanly in all your opera- 
tions. 


CHAPTER V 
THE TELEPHOTOGRAPHIC LENS AND ITS USES 


Tue telephoto lens is of such inestimable value 
to the nature worker, and so few people really 
give it credit for what it can do, that I think a 
chapter none too little to devote to it and its 
uses. 

To define it very untechnically, it is a lens 
having the properties of a telescope in a dimin- 
ished degree. Its main characteristics are two: 
it will give photographs of objects on a larger 
scale than will an ordinary lens with the same 
extension of bellows and from the same point of 
view; it is not of any fixed focal length and can 
be focussed to give a sharp image at any camera 
extension (measured from the negative lens to the 
ground glass), provided only that the extension is 
as great as, or greater than, the focal length of the 
front, or positive, lens. 

The front lens is generally an ordinary photo- 
graphic lens, and any make can be used for that 
purpose. The faster lenses are, however, prefer- 
able, as the addition of the rear, or negative, 

7o 


The Telephotographic Lens and its Uses 71 


element very greatly reduces the speed. The 
negative lens is useless by itself and can, therefore, 
be used only in conjunction with the ordinary, or 
positive, element. 

The telephoto lens is focussed by altering the 
distance between the front, or positive, lens and 
the back, or negative, lens. This is done by 
means of a thumb-screw on the barrel of the lens. 
The shorter the camera extension the greater must 
be the separation of the positive and negative 
elements, and wzce versa. In focussing one must 
use extreme care, for the plane of sharpness is 
limited, and therefore the focus must be exact or 
the resulting picture will be blurred. 

In order to secure as great a range of focal 
lengths (and consequent magnifications of the size 
of the image) as possible, the camera used should 
be capable of a considerable amount of extension, 
at least twenty to twenty-five inches in a five by 
seven and correspondingly more in the larger 
sizes. A telephoto lens will then give enlarge- 
ments over the ordinary lens of anywhere from 
three to twelve or fifteen diameters. Of course, 
the longer the extension of the bellows the greater 
the resulting enlargement, but there is a conse- 
quent diminishing of speed; therefore we are often 
forced to sacrifice size of the image where speed 
is absolutely necessary. 

The best telephoto lenses are capable of work- 


72 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


ing, under ordinary conditions, at from one second 
to 5 of a second at full opening, according to 
the length of the bellows’ extension; and, under 
very favorable conditions, where the light is 
very strong, exposures can be made in from 
gz to x4 of a second. When such rapid 
exposures are made, however, the negative is 
liable to be underexposed and must be devel- 
oped, accordingly, with the greatest care, in 
order to bring out a satisfactory image. In 
fact it is always well, in work with the telephoto, 
to presuppose that your negative is underexposed. 
If it is not, no damage is done; but if it is, as is 
most apt to be the case, and the ordinary strength 
developer is used upon it, then a chemical fog will 
result, and it will be impossible for you to bring 
out all the detail there is in the negative, or to 
carry it to anywhere near the desired density. 
Absolute rigidity of the camera and stand is 
necessary, for, on account of the enlargement of 
the image, the least vibration will cause blurring 
and an unsatisfactory result. The telephoto lens 
is, naturally, much heavier than the ordinary lens, 
and, therefore, where long extension of the bellows 
is desired, it is well to use braces to hold the front 
board perfectly rigid; for often the mere releasing 
of the shutter will jar it sufficiently to cause a 
blurred image. For this reason it is difficult to 
use this lens in any kind of a hand camera, but, 


The Telephotographic Lens and its Uses 73 


by the exercise of great care, it can be done and 
some very excellent results obtained. It has even 
been used on flying birds; but the negatives, in 
such an instance, are bound to be so badly 
underexposed on account of the necessarily rapid 
exposure that must be made that, even by the ex- 
ercise of the greatest care in the development, 
they are seldom all that could be desired. 

The stops on a telephoto lens act in directly 
the opposite manner than do those on an ordinary 
one, for while, in an ordinary lens, the smaller the 
stop used the greater the covering power obtained, 
with a telephoto the reverse is true, and the more 
it is stopped down the smaller will be the covering 
power, until, if the smallest stop is used, only a 
circle in the centre of the plate will be exposed 
unless the lens is made to cover a much larger 
plate than the one it is being worked with. So it 
is always best to use it wide open, or at its largest 
aperture, and obtain sharpness of definition by 
accurate focussing. This not only gives better 
covering power, but also, naturally, greater speed. 

In selecting a shutter for use with this lens one 
which works as smoothly and with as little jar 
as possible is desirable, for when an exposure of 
one or two seconds is required, the jar made by 
the opening of the shutter will sometimes cause 
a sufficient vibration to blur the image. 

The usefulness of a telephoto lens lies entirely 


74 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


in the fact that distant objects can be photographed 
with comparatively little trouble, and fairly large 
images of them be obtained, when it would be 
impracticable to get a picture that would show 
anything with the ordinary lens. 

In nature work it is often impossible to ap- 
proach near enough to one’s subject to use the 
ordinary lens satisfactorily, but with the telephoto 
one can, practically, cause his subject to approach 
him close enough to give a good-sized image. 
Its only drawbacks are those which I have men- 
tioned: lack of speed and the care which must be 
used both in focussing and making the exposure. 
In short, the photographer using a telephoto lens 
needs more time both before and during the ex- 
posure than the wild things are always willing to 
give; and yet it is an indispensable adjunct to a 
nature worker’s outfit, for there are many occasions, 
constantly arising, when the use of any other 
lens would be impossible. 

A deer or any other animal will often lie or 
stand perfectly still long enough to allow us to 
set up our camera and make, not only one, but sev- 
eral exposures if the work is done from a distance 
of seventy-five or a hundred yards; but should we 
attempt to approach that same animal close enough 
to use an ordinary lens, he would leave long before 
we got within anything like the necessary range. 
A bird will often sit quietly on her nest and allow 


The Telepbotographic Lens and its Uses 75 


one to photograph her with a telephoto from a 
distance of twenty-five or thirty feet, but few of 
them will sit quietly when one tries to come much 
closer to them than this. 

Then, too, there are times when one cannot, 
even if the subject will allow it, approach close 
enough to use the ordinary lens. For photograph- 
ing birds’ nests on inaccessible cliffs or at the end 
of branches too small to hold even the weight of 
the camera, the telephoto lens is invaluable; and 
when one becomes thoroughly conversant with the 
workings of one and its various uses, he will find 
that he will often employ it in preference to any 
other of his lenses and will never cease to wonder 
at the ease with which he can obtain pictures that 
had always before seemed to him impossible. 
Many of the nature photographs at which the 
uninitiated are apt to exclaim in wonder do not 
seem such miracles of the photographic art when 
looked at through the medium of a telephoto lens; 
and one has but to gain a thorough knowledge of 
the possibilities which are opened up by the use 
of one of these instruments to cause him to for- 
ever afterwards swear by them. When he once 
does gain this knowledge, he will never again be 
without one. 

As I have already said, any lens which one hap- 
pens to have can be used as the positive, or front, 
element, and the cost of the telephoto, the rear or 


76 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


‘SUS YOUL-}YSIa UB YIM ‘spIvA CZ JNOge Jo 9OULISIP & WO ‘UdHeL 


The Telephotographic Lens and its Uses 77 


negative element, is but a slight additional ex- 
pense. In consideration of its usefulness it is the 
cheapest part of a nature worker’s outfit and is 
easily within the reach of anybody’s pocketbook. 

To the beginner it may seem absurd, and, 
indeed, to those who know nothing of the possibili- 
ties of this lens it seems nothing short of miracu- 
lous, that photographs can be taken of an animal 
the size of a deer at distances varying from one 
hundred to two hundred yards and good-sized 
images be obtained. Yet this is not only possible, 
but easy of accomplishment, when the camera is 
used at its greatest extension and, in the bright 
sunlight, the exposure necessary to obtain a perfect 
negative does not exceed one to two seconds. In 
fact, when one first uses this instrument he is apt 
to over rather than under expose his negatives. I 
know this was the case with me, for I found it hard 
to realize that negatives could be made with it with 
no greater exposure than I soon found was nec- 
essary. I remember that when developing the 
first negative I ever took with one I was com- 
pletely mystified that it should come up positively 
black, with almost no detail showing. This I 
could not understand until I learned that instead 
of the five-second exposure I had given I should 
have used less than a quarter of a second. 

It is difficult to give any definite instructions in 
regard to the exposure, as it increases in accord- 


78 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


ance with the extension of bellows used and varies 
according to the speed of the positive lens. One 
must learn for himself, which he can do bya little 
experimenting, just how much longer exposure it 
is necessary to give when using the telephoto 
attachment, and in just what proportion to in- 
crease it as he increases the length of bellows. 

Roughly speaking, about four times the length 
of exposure is needed when the magnification does 
not exceed two and a half to three diameters as 
would be required with the ordinary lens, and this 
increases proportionately to the number of magni- 
fications. 

Another great advantage of the telephoto lens 
over one of the ordinary type 1s that it shows much 
better perspective. With its use we get none of 
that grotesque foreshortening which it is almost 
impossible to avoid when using the short focus 
lenses on near-by objects, and which often does 
much to mar the beauty and usefulness of an 
otherwise successful picture, if, indeed, it does 
not ruin it entirely. 

The telephoto may be used successfully in the 
reflex, but only in bright sunlight and by the ex- 
ercise of the greatest care, for it would be impos- 
sible to hold the camera absolutely immovable 
during an exposure exceeding a fifth of a second. 
It can be used, however, with entire success on 
birds and animals in cases where they would not 


The Telephotographic Lens and its Uses 79 


Taken, from same distance as photograph on page 76, with same lens and telephoto attachment. 


80 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


allow us the time to set up and focus with a tripod 
instrument. 

The accompanying photographs, which I have 
used to illustrate this chapter, have been made 
expressly for this volume, with the idea of clearly 
showing the comparative advantage of a telephoto 
lens over an ordinary one. That this advantage is 
great I think no one can deny, and no one who has 
ever used a telephoto in nature work will dispute 
me, I feel sure, when I say that, next to the reflex 
type of camera, it is the one appliance that has done 
more than anything else toward making possible 
much that has been accomplished in nature pho- 
tography. Therefore, no nature worker’s outfit 
is entirely complete without one. 


CHAPTER VI 
APPARATUS FOR A FIELD WORKER 


Tue absolutely necessary apparatus which one 
must have in order to work along the lines of 
nature photography is not very extensive or very 
expensive. It is always well, however, when one 
wishes to do the best work possible, to be supplied 
with the best tools possible. So it is always 
advisable to start out with the proper outfit, even 
though it does cost a little more than one antici- 
pated, than to spend less money and find that 
one’s apparatus is inadequate to the demands 
made upon it and be forced to discard it even- 
tually in favor of that which should have been 
originally bought. 

This will inevitably happen if one starts out 
with a poor outfit, although I should advise the 
beginner to start with but one camera until he 
has become somewhat familiar with the work and 
found out whether or not he wishes to continue 
at it. By that time, too, he will have become 
better acquainted with the different makes of 
cameras and lenses and will, consequently, be 

G 81 


82 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


better able to choose for himself than I am to 
choose for him. 

It is said that a good workman can work with 
any tools, but it is not so in photography; for no 
one can take a picture requiring an exposure of 
xt, of a second with a lens whose limit of capacity 
in speed does not exceed 5 of a second, and no 
one can make a shutter whose highest tension 
allows it to work no faster than ;4, of a second 
answer the purpose of one that is manufactured 
especially to make exposures ranging from 7, to 
Toop Of a second. 

In work on the living wild things speed is pre- 
eminently necessary. We cannot tell our subjects 
to “sit still and look pleasant,” but we must be 
ready to catch their images whenever and wher- 
ever we may; and in order to do this an exposure 
of zylop Of a second is no unusual thing. This 
may seem to be an absurdly small length of time, 
and, indeed, it is almost smaller than we can 
appreciate. It is faster than the human eye can 
work, and yet it is none too fast to stop the action 
in the wings of a flying bird and it is entirely 
inadequate when applied to the rapidly fluttering 
wings of a butterfly. Photographs are taken in 
less time than this, remarkable as it may seem to 
some, but not, however, with the orthodox camera 
and lens; and it is unnecessary for me to enter 
into a description of anything but those appli- 


Apparatus for a Field Worker 83 


ances which are a necessity to the nature photog- 
rapher. 

To try to tell a man just what make of camera, 
lens, and shutter he must use would, in my 
opinion, be almost if not quite as absurd as to try 
to influence him in his choice of a rifle or shot- 
gun, especially when he already knows something 
about them. With cameras, as with guns, there 
are many makes upon the market, all equally 
good; but naturally each photographer has his 
favorite make, as each sportsman has his favorite 
gun, and each is apt to think that the particular 
make which he uses 1s the best. 

So, to the experienced man, who already has 
his ideas inviolately fixed and with whose ideas 
some of mine may conflict, I make my apologies 
and beg him to remember that, as I have already 
stated, this volume is written as an aid to the 
mere tyro, he who knows nothing of the work he 
is about to attempt, and not to the man who is 
already experienced in that work. 

It is almost always discouraging to the beginner 
to look over the long list of photographic appara- 
tus and to try to pick out the camera, lens, and 
other appliances which he thinks he will need, 
realizing, as he must inevitably do, that he really 
knows nothing about it. I know this was the 
case with me, even a number of years ago, when 
the name of the different makes was not so nearly 


84 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


legion as it is now. One is very apt in his per- 
plexity to turn to the dealer for aid, and he, rarely 
being a practical photographer and almost never 
one who has any knowledge of the nature end 
of it, will induce him to buy a number of abso- 
lutely useless things and omit many that are 
necessary. Moreover he will, naturally, try to sell 
him those things upon which he makes the largest 
profits, regardless of whether they are necessary 
to the outfit or not, unless, as is infrequently the 
case, that particular dealer happens to be a 
thoroughly conscientious man. 

I find, with all due regard to the dealers in 
photographic goods and supplies, that most of 
them are entirely without conscience and would 
much rather sell a man who knows nothing about 
it a camera of the vintage of ’90 than one that is 
up to date ; and cameras are not like wine, they do 
not improve with age. 

A great difficulty in trying to give anything 
like a complete list of the apparatus needed for 
successful work is the fact of the constant change 
and improvement in that apparatus. The thing 
that may be the best for to-day’s work may be 
superseded by something infinitely better to- 
morrow, and that may again be supplanted on the 
following day; for there is actually scarcely a day 
passes that does not find some new appliance 
placed on the market, or, at least, some improve- 


Apparatus for a Field Worker 85 


ment on the old, to simplify the various processes 
of photography. 

However, I shall give from my experience, 
combined with what I know of the experience of 
others, hints concerning the apparatus which I 
have found most useful, and shall hope that those 
hints will be taken for what they are worth; for my 
opinions, while based upon a fair amount of knowl- 
edge, I do not fora moment consider infallible, 
nor do I wish any of my readers to consider them 
as such. 

In the first place, I would advise all beginners 
to use as little apparatus as possible and to make 
that apparatus as light as is compatible with 
strength and rigidity. When one starts out for a 
ten or fifteen mile tramp in the quest of subjects 
it is well that the burden he has to carry should 
be as small as possible, for every extra pound will 
begin to tell after the second or third mile, and 
before he has returned he will think that the 
weight has increased tenfold. 

I almost invariably use, on my long jaunts, a 
four by five camera. This size is, I think, the 
most practical for all-round nature work. It is 
light and can be carried long distances without 
inconvenience, takes up little room, and at least 
two dozen plates can easily be carried with it in 
plate-holders or magazine. 

The plates, after development, can be much 


86 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


more easily packed away and cared for than can 
those of a larger size, and they are of the most 
convenient size and shape both for making 
enlargements from and for reducing for lantern 
slides. Moreover, and this is of no little conse- 
quence, they are much cheaper than are the larger 
ones. 

The camera should be a long-focus one, with 
extension of bellows at both front and back, and 
should be of the best and most substantial make; 
for it will receive many a hard knock before you 
are done with it, knocks that a lightly built camera 
will not stand. Itshould have both the reversible 
and swing back and the rising front, all of which 
have been described in a previous chapter. With 
this style of camera I have done much of my best 
work, and for all general photography there is 
none better. 

As the worker advances and becomes more and 
more adept in his art, he will find other cameras 
of different sizes, while not absolutely necessary 
to the successful issue of his work, at least very 
useful, and he can add them to his outfit as occa- 
sion demands; but at first one camera will be 
sufficient for all his needs. 

As to plate-holders, one can be none too care- 
ful in his selection of them, for upon them a great 
deal of his future success depends. There is 
nothing more discouraging or maddening than 


Apparatus for a Field Worker 87 


to find that an exposure from which one expected 
much has been irredeemably ruined by a defec- 
tive plate-holder. It is strange that, while such 
immense improvements have been made in cam- 
eras, the one part that is of almost the most 
importance, the plate-holder, should still be inade- 
quate to the demands made upon it. There are 
almost no plate-holders made in this country that 
are absolutely light-tight, for the best of them 
will not stand the test of a half-hour’s exposure 
to the direct rays of the sun without fogging the 
plate, and many cannot be left with safety in the 
sunlight for more than a few seconds. They are 
the one part of the apparatus that we should 
never select on account of their lightness, for the 
lighter they are the more flimsily are they made; 
and although the cheaper, lighter ones may an- 
swer when used with the greatest care and exposed 
to a strong light as little as possible, still, they 
will not stand the wear and tear that is bound to 
fall to their lot and will soon be in such a condi- 
tion that they will be entirely useless. I am 
partial to a plate-holder with a hard rubber slide, 
for, although it is apt to become brittle in cold 
weather and correspondingly soft in warm, it is 
the most opaque of any and cannot be injured by 
dampness. The ones made with a dull finish are 
the best. 

So, in selecting your plate-holders, get those 


88 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


that are as strongly made as possible, regardless 
of the weight, and above all do not buy any pat- 
tern that does not allow of the plate being in- 
serted and removed with the greatest ease. It 
will often be found necessary to change plates in 
the dark, in any closet or other place that is light- 
tight, and sometimes even in the open, after dark, 
or inside a closed tent or even a sleeping bag. 
This is frequently a test of one’s patience under 
the best conditions, and if the plates insist on 
sticking in the plate-holders it increases the 
difficulties. At least one dozen _plate-holders 
should be purchased, for one should carry not 
less than two dozen plates on a day’s photograph- 
ing trip. 

Magazine plate-holders are useful, inasmuch as 
they allow one to carry more plates in less 
space, and the manipulation of them is easier and 
quicker than when plate-holders are used. I do 
not unreservedly recommend them, however, as 
I think they are still far from being perfected. 
They are too easily gotten out of order and the 
plates stick at just the critical moment; or else 
a small hole or break appears, usually in the 
leather top, of which we know nothing and which 
will admit enough light to ruin a dozen plates 
before we discover the damage that is being done. 
Therefore I always stick to the old-fashioned 
plate-holders, which, while being somewhat cum- 


Apparatus for a Field Worker 89 


bersome, I consider more satisfactory in the long 
run. 

In this connection a changing bag is often a 
useful thing, although it is difficult to find one 
that is satisfactory and that will not wear out and 
become useless in a short time. 

When one is going on a camera hunting trip, 
however, where he will have no access to anything 
resembling a dark room, it is well enough to take 
one along, as by its use one can remove his plates 
from and reload his plate-holders even in broad 
daylight. Mr. Dugmore describes one which he 
has found useful as follows: “ A simple form that 
answers for a changing bag is a square, box-shaped 
bag, well reénforced and bound at the edges. At 
each corner there is a loop to which cords are 
attached that will hold the bag in position; two 
sleevelike openings (with rubber bands to hold 
them closely about one’s arms) on one side admit 
the arms and should be made large enough to let 
the plate-holders enter.” He further says that 
one made of pantasote is the best, as any material 
in which rubber is used will soon harden and 
crack. In this I fully agree with him, and I think 
that the one he describes is probably the simplest 
and best form of a changing bag that one could 
use. When in use it is swung from any conven- 
ient branch or branches, and while one cannot 
well see what he is doing, when he once knows 


90 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


his plate-holders and the manner in which the 
plates are packed in boxes, this is not necessary, 
for feeling is all that is then requisite. 

In regard to the tripod: one that combines 
lightness with thorough rigidity is desirable. 
These two qualities are in. no way incompatible 
if the tripod is made of the proper kind of wood. 
English ash is good, but heavier than mahogany 
or willow, and both the latter make good, strong 
tripods. The head should be broad, so that when 
the camera is attached it will have a solid base 
upon which to rest. The legs should telescope 
or fold at least three times or, better still, four, so 
that it can be packed in as small a space as pos- 
sible, but the screw nuts at the joints should be 
strong enough to hold absolutely firmly. The 
tripod is not necessarily indispensable, but it is an 
extremely important adjunct to the outfit, and as 
it will receive much hard usage it should be so 
built as to withstand it. The telescope tripods 
made of aluminum are very pretty to look at, but 
their only recommendation lies in their lightness. 
So far as rigidity is concerned they are useless, 
for the merest breath of air will cause them to 
sway, and therefore they should never be used. 
The screw bolt which attaches the camera to the 
tripod head should be undetachable, otherwise it 
can easily be lost and so destroy the usefulness of 
the tripod. 


Apparatus for a Field Worker 91 


A tilting table is sometimes useful in cases 
where the camera is to be pointed downward, but 
it is a heavy contrivance, increasing one’s load, 
and is never absolutely necessary. 

For certain work indoors it will be found nec- 
essary to have a form of camera stand that will 
permit the placing of the subject on a piece of 
plate-glass maintained in a horizontal position, 
while the camera is secured vertically above and 
pointing directly downward at it. There are a 
number of such devices, and any of the larger 
photographic houses can fulfil your wants in this 
direction. 

A ball and socket clamp, which is made in 
different sizes and which can be carried in one’s 
pocket, is almost indispensable when photograph- 
ing from trees, for it not only fastens the camera 
securely to any branch, but allows of its being 
tilted or swung in any direction, even in a vertical 
position, and held there securely. 

Now as to the lens, and in this respect one 
must rely largely on his own judgment and the 
capacity of his pocket-book. There are many 
lenses on the market, and those of the highest 
grades are all equally good. The cheaper anas- 
tigmatic lenses which are usually sold with an 
outfit will answer many purposes, but when it 
comes to very rapid work, they fall short of the 
requirements. For a beginner this style of lens 


92 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


will probably do, but as he advances he will find 
that it is inadequate for the various uses to which 
he may wish to put it. In most branches of work 
speed is necessary, as is also depth of field and 
definition. All these qualities are combined in the 
highest possible degree in the best lenses. The 
longer the focus of your lens the better, and it is 
always well to get a Jens that will cover a plate 
one size larger than the plate you intend to use. 
By doing so you acquire greater length of focus 
and greater covering power, which is useful where 
the rising front of the camera is used. 

A short-focus lens distorts objects that are close 
to the camera, often to such an extent that the 
results are grotesque and ludicrous in the extreme. 
Unfortunately those lenses of the very highest 
speed have the least depth of field, and I would 
advise that for all-round use one working at about 
F.6 be used. This gives sufficient speed for all 
work, under ordinary conditions, combining with 
it a fairly considerable depth of field. The best 
lens is one whose two. systems of combinations 
have different foci and can be used separately. 
In such an instrument we have practically three 
lenses in one, the front combination being of one 
length of focus, the rear of another, and the entire 
lens, or couplet, of a third. Of course the single 
combination is much slower than the double, and 
this must be taken into consideration when using it. 


Apparatus for a Field Worker 93 


Of the telephoto lens I have already written, 
and it needs only to be said here that it forms an 
invaluable adjunct to the outfit. 

Among the shutters there is almost as great a 
choice as among the lenses, but in buying one we 
should be careful that, in making the exposure, it 
works as smoothly and makes as little noise as 
possible, for the click of a shutter is often suffi- 
cient to scare a wary bird or animal. We must 
also remember that, while each shutter has its 
time-scale, these scales are seldom absolutely 
correct, and that they are intended more to repre- 
sent degrees of difference than exact measure- 
ments of time. Thus, while most of the later 
patterns of shutters are scaled to work automati- 
cally at from about three seconds to the +4, of a 
second, they rarely exceed in speed 7), of a 
second, and frequently the best they can do is 
less than that. For extremely rapid work the 
choice is not so great, however, but is limited to 
one type: the focal plane shutter, which is capable 
of making an exposure in zj/g95 Of a second, but 
which has been described elsewhere and so needs 
no further mention here. 

For rapid work, also, such as birds flying, fish 
leaping, animals running, etc., the only camera that 
can be used successfully is one of the reflecting 
type, which I have also fully described elsewhere, 
or else a twin lens, which is more cumbersome, 


94 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


more expensive, and not so good. The photog- 
rapher, as soon as he has mastered the intricacies 
of the tripod camera, will do well to add one of 
these indispensable, although rather expensive, 
boxes to his outfit. He will never have cause to 
regret the necessary expenditure, for with it he 
can obtain pictures that it would be absolute folly 
to attempt with an ordinary camera. 

So much for the actual camera; but the acces- 
sories are of great importance and must not be 
overlooked or slighted, for upon them often 
depends the success of the picture. 

The focussing cloth is of some importance. It 
should be of some stout material that will wear 
well and let as little light through as possible. 
The ordinary focussing cloth sold by the dealers 
is not good, for, while at first its quality is excel- 
lent, it soon wears at the creases where it is folded 
and becomes useless. I use a rubber cloth, made 
by a few rubber goods houses, in which the rub- 
ber is woven into the texture of the goods and 
not merely coated upon the surface. This wears 
well and is practically opaque. The cloth should 
be large enough to admit of its being wrapped 
completely about the camera when the latter is 
set up and opened, leaving nothing but the lens 
uncovered. This is often necessary in order that 
the plate may be thoroughly protected when 
the camera is left standing in the sunlight, as 


Apparatus for a Field Worker 95 


is frequently the case, in photographing birds 
especially. 

About one hundred feet of small rubber tubing 
and a large rubber bulb or small hand bicycle 
pump should always be carried,—this for use 
when it is found necessary, or at least advisable, 
to release the shutter from a distance. The best 
form of bulb that I have found is the large rubber 
syringe used for sprinkling plants. The nozzle 
can be cut off and a plug fitted to attach to the 
end of the tubing. This bulb, by a slight squeeze, 
will give a sufficient air pressure, which the ordi- 
nary exposure bulb, sold by photographic dealers, 
will not. 

For those who make extended trips after sub- 
jects it is always well to carry with them a small 
quantity of concentrated developer and fixer. 
Water for washing can, most usually, be found, 
as any stream or pond will answer the purpose. 
While it is not wise to attempt to develop all the 
negatives you make before returning to your 
proper dark room and apparatus, it is well to 
develop a few now and then in order that you 
may be sure that there is nothing wrong with the 
working of your camera or with the exposures 
you are giving. I am acquainted with a man 
who once went on a long photographic trip, dur- 
ing which he made some three or four hundred 
exposures. He was foolish enough not to test 


96 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


any of them, however, for which he paid dearly, 
for when he came to do his developing upon his 
return home, he found that every plate had been 
light-struck by a small hole in the bellows of his 
camera which had escaped his notice. This is 
apt to happen to any one, and it is not always 
safe to trust to luck, especially when the results 
are important. 

In order to do any developing afield a portable 
developing tent is needed. Unfortunately there 
are none at present on the market that are really 
good, but I am living in the hopes that some day 
one of the numerous photographic supply houses 
will correct this deficiency. 

There are, however, two patterns, from which 
one may choose, that serve to answer the purpose. 
In one of these the arms only are put inside. 
There are two pieces of yellow glass on opposite 
sides, one of which to look through in order to 
follow development, the other to illuminate the 
plate. This has the disadvantage of not allow- 
ing one to see the plate with distinctness, but 
at least allows him to keep cool while he is 
working. 

The other style admits one’s head, shoulders, 
and arms, and is then fastened about the waist. 
It has but one glass window and in cold 
weather is well enough; but in hot weather 
it is equal to a Turkish bath, as well as nearly 


Apparatus for a Field Worker 97 


suffocating one, and is dangerous, also, to the 
welfare of the plates. 

There are many sundries which one can use to 
advantage and which are not usually included in 
a regulation photographic outfit. Among these 
may be mentioned a pair of good climbers for 
ascending trees. These should be made with 
longer spurs than are on those ordinarily used 
by the telegraphic linemen, so that they may 
easily penetrate through the bark of the tree 
and into the solid wood beneath. I should not 
recommend any one to make his first attempt at 
their use on a very high tree. A plentiful supply 
of stout cord is also useful in many cases. It 
should be strong enough to admit of hauling up 
and lowering the camera from tree-tops. Many 
photographers screen their cameras with leaf-cov- 
ered boughs, etc. I use merely a large piece of 
green cloth. It often will be found necessary to 
thus screen the camera, for the two things about 
it that seem to frighten the subjects most are the 
lens and the legs of the tripod. The former it is 
impossible to entirely cover up, but the latter can 
be made invisible, and for this purpose, as I have 
said, I use a piece of green cloth, which blends 
sufficiently well with the surrounding foliage to 
allay, in most cases, the fears of my subject. 

A mirror is frequently of extreme assistance. 
It should be of heavy plate-glass, so as not to 

H 


98 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


break easily, and at least eight or ten inches 
square. Its usefulness consists of reflecting light 
upon dark subjects, such as birds’ nests in holes, 
etc. which could not be successfully photographed 
without the aid of such reflected light. A smaller 
mirror, which can be held in front of the camera 
and which will enable the operator to set his shut- 
ter at any desired speed from the back of the 
camera by reading the reflection in the mirror, 
will aiso be found useful, for many occasions 
arise, especially in work from tree-tops, where it 
is impossible to get to the front of the camera. 

Last in my list, but by no means the least in 
importance, is the choice of plates to be used. 
This question of which is the best plate to use is 
one upon which different photographers differ 
greatly, for while one will swear by a certain brand 
of plate, another will say that that particular brand 
is worthless, or nearly so, when compared with 
some other. The fact of the matter is that there 
are many good plates on the market, and I have 
arrived at the conclusion that the plate with which 
any worker can obtain the best results is the best 
plate for him to use and to stick to, for the con- 
stant changing of makes of plates is foolish. 

As I have not said anything elsewhere on the 
subject of plates, it may be well to put in a few 
words here. 

There are three styles of plates on the market 


Apparatus for a Field Worker 99 


that are useful to the nature photographer. 
These are: the ordinary fast plate, of which 
Seed’s 27 or Cramer’s Crown are probably the 
best examples ; the Iso- or Orthochromatic plate ; 
and the Non-halation plate. The first is a plate of 
fast emulsion, with no particular quality, useful in 
all ordinary cases, and up to within the past few 
years the best plate on the market. The isochro- 
matic or orthochromatic plate is one that is coated 
with an emulsion made especially sensitive to the 
reds, greens, and yellows, and therefore gives more 
accurate color values. The non-halation plate is 
one which prevents, by a double coating of the 
emulsion, blurring around strongly lighted places 
such as the window of a room looked at from the 
inside. There is also a plate, which has lately 
been placed upon the market, which combines 
these two qualities and which is called the non- 
halation orthochromatic plate. This is, to my 
mind, the finest plate that has ever been manu- 
factured, and is most excellent for every style of 
work. 

For general use I should recommend the ortho- 
chromatic plate as giving the best results under 
all circumstances. It is made in three grades: 
fast, medium, and slow. The slow gives the best 
color values, but cannot be used for instantaneous 
work. Ordinary plates will do well enough for 
snap-shot work and are easier to manipulate in the 


100 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


dark room, as they are capable of standing much 
more light without fogging; but in flower work, 
especially, orthochromatic plates are a necessity. 

A ray filter or color screen is a helpful adjunct 
in use with these plates, as it accentuates the color 
values. The best consists of simply a piece of 
glass stained yellow. Any one can make one for 
himself by thoroughly fixing an unexposed plate 
in fresh hypo and then, after a short washing, soak 
it in a ten per cent solution of bichromate of pot- 
ash until the required density of color is reached. 
After it has dried, cover the film side with a 
piece of clean glass, bind the edges, and you will 
have a perfect colorscreen. It should be fastened 
either to the front or back of the lens, and should 
be so fixed that no rays of light can pass through 
the lens that do not also pass through the screen ; 
otherwise it would not answer its purpose of 
entirely “filtering” the light. It must be remem- 
bered, however, that, when using one of these 
screens, the exposure which would be given with- 
out it must be increased from four to ten times, 
according to the density of the screen. 

On long trips, where weight and space are a 
consideration, the cut film is really an excellent 
substitute for the glass plate and has the added 
virtue of being absolutely unbreakable. It is made 
of heavier celluloid than are the roll films, and is 
carried in a film-holder made for the purpose and 


Apparatus for a Field Worker 101 


inserted in the ordinary plate-holder in the same 
manner as a plate. 

In my work I use the orthochromatic plates, to 
the almost exclusion of all others, both with and 
without the color screen, as I find that they in- 
variably give me the best results. The beginner, 
however, must experiment for himself until he 
finds the plate which he considers best adapted to 
his uses. 


Gia ae evel! 
PHOTOGRAPHING THE LARGER ANIMALS 


THERE are few people, of those who use a 
camera or of those who do not, who realize the 
immense possibilities there are for pleasure and 
excitement in the photographing of the wild 
animals, the “big game.” It is a field in which 
but little has as yet been accomplished, but in 
which much can be done, and it is undoubtedly 
the sportsmen who can do this better than any 
one else. This is because they know the ani- 
mals, their habits and haunts, better than do 
most of us, and because they know also the best 
and surest means of approaching them. 

This is not a field, however, that any one can 
enter, for it means work that necessitates the 
taking of long trips into the denser wooded parts 
of the country, and not every one can afford the 
time to do this. 

Here we cannot go out for a day’s work, as we 
can when photographing the birds or even the 
smaller mammals, but we must prepare for it 
weeks in advance; for it means the collecting of 


102 


Photographing the Larger Animals 103 


apparatus and camping outfit and, unless we are 
well acquainted with the part of the country we 
would visit, the looking up of travelling routes 
and the hiring of guides. In fact it is nothing 
more or less than a hunting trip on which the 
camera takes the place of the rifle, or, at least, is 
used in conjunction with it. 

Moreover, it should not be taken except by 
those men who are physically capable of with- 
standing much in the way of exposure, fatigue, 
and hard, nerve-racking exertion. Photographs 
of the larger wild things, the deer, moose, cougar, 
etc, are only obtained by strenuous and often 
dangerous work, and the ability to follow, at no 
matter what cost, wherever your subject may lead, 
until you have had your opportunity to catch his 
image on your sensitive plate. It requires a 
strength and endurance with which not many of 
us are blessed, and those who are not possessed of 
these necessary qualities or have not the nerve to 
face at close quarters an angry elk at bay, or a 
cougar treed and ready to spring, had _ better 
not attempt it, but confine their labors to some 
branch of photography that requires, perhaps, just 
as much real brain-work and ingenuity, but less 
of actual physical power. 

Recent literature has given us really astonish- 
ing and wonderful proof of the courage, hardi- 
hood, and skill of those naturalist sportsmen who 


104 Photography for the Sportsman 


Naturalist 


American Elk, Horns in Velvet. 


Photographing the Larger Animals 105 


will follow in the track of any animal, sometimes 
even for days or weeks, regardless of danger, toil, 
or exposure, until the desired picture is obtained. 
Of these Mr. A. G. Wallihan of Colorado is, per- 
haps, the most indefatigable, and he has to his 
credit some truly marvellous results of his hunting. 

With an eight by ten camera on his back and a 
pack of hounds he considers it nothing to follow 
in the tracks of a cougar for miles over the rough- 
est country and through deep snow, hanging on 
with a grim tenacity, until his quarry is treed, 
then approaching with his camera, while his 
dogs hold the creature at bay, sometimes even 
climbing the same tree in which the cougar has 
sought refuge, regardless of the danger of so 
close an approach to the enraged beast, until he 
is near enough to obtain such a picture as he 
wishes. 

His results, however, must be a sufficient 
recompense to him for all his hard work and ex- 
posure to imminent danger, for his photographs 
are, undoubtedly, the most remarkable products 
of the camera in the line of nature work that 
have ever been made and will so stand for some 
time. The most remarkable one of them all that 
I have seen is, to my mind, one in which he 
photographed the cougar as he sprang at him 
from a tree-top and which actually shows the 
animal in mid-air. 


106 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


If this kind of work is not exciting enough for 
the most exacting, calling, as it does, for a display 
of the greatest coolness and nerve under trying 
circumstances, then I am at a loss to know just 
what could satisfy him. 

Mr. W. E. Carlin, who was at one time a most 
enthusiastic sportsman, but who has of late years 
used a camera almost exclusively, in preference 
to a gun, on his hunting trips, has done much 
excellent work, principally in the Bitter Root 
Mountains in Montanaand Idaho. I am inclined 
to believe that with the black and the white tailed 
deer, particularly, no one has done any better 
work than has he, for many of his photographs 
of these animals are as near perfection as 
possible. 

He has used entirely a telephoto lens on these 
subjects, photographing from a blind at a distance 
of from seventy-five to one hundred yards from 
the deer. His photographs of lynxes are also 
most excellent. These he obtained by trapping 
the animals and tying to one of their hind legs a 
clog heavy enough to keep them from running, 
but not so heavy as to entirely impede their 
motion. Then, by following them about until 
they assumed natural and characteristic attitudes, 
he was enabled to obtain just what he wanted. 
This may seem simple and easy enough to the 
uninitiated, but to face an enraged lynx, even 


Photographing the Larger Animals 107 


though he is clogged, at a distance of three or 
four feet, and calmly focus your camera and make 
an exposure, for he was not using a reflex, takes 
an amount of courage and an exhibition of nerve 
of which not every one is possessed. That the 
results are not always all that can be wished is 
evidenced by the fact that Mr. Carlin once made 
a snow-shoe trip of three days’ duration in the 
quest of photographs of these animals, sleeping 
out on the snow at night, and carrying, besides 
his provisions and a blanket, his heavy six 
and a half by eight and a half camera outfit. 
While he made many exposures, when he came 
to develop them he discovered that, through one 
cause or another, only two or three of the lot were 
good. This certainly is disheartening, but tends 
to make those good pictures which we do obtain 
the more valuable and worth having. 

Success in work on the larger animals is due 
not only to the capability of endurance, but also 
to absolute vigilance and the strictest attention to 
every detail. 

Once stalk a deer with a camera instead of with 
a rifle and you will soon learn the difference be- 
tween the two methods of hunting; and you will, 
in all probability, agree with me when I say that 
for the display of all the skill and ingenuity, cool- 
ness and patience, that one may possess there is 
no comparison between the use of a gun and a 


108 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


camera, as the advantage lies too heavily with the 
latter. 

Learn all there is to know about still hunting 
and then double every precaution known to the 
hunter’s art and you may succeed in your hunting 
with a camera, but fail in a single particular or let 
your caution abate for one second of time and the 
chances are that you will get no picture, but, in- 
stead, will be forced to stand and watch your 
quarry go crashing off through the woods. 

Above all, the excitement of the chase must 
not cause you to forget your object, or to cease 
to be cognizant of everything that you are doing. 
You may not think this is lable to happen, but it 
is. I have known of a man, and he was no 
novice at the game either, who let an excellent 
opportunity to get a picture of an elk escape him 
simply because, as he himself said, in the excite- 
ment of seeing the animal so close to him he 
entirely forgot that he had a camera in his hands. 

Mr. A. R. Dugmore tells of an experience of a 
similar nature that he had while photographing 
moose in northern Maine. He says: “Once 
when I was on a hunting trip trying to secure 
some moose pictures, I came across a fine large 
bull. The situation was perfect from a pictorial 
point of view. He was in a large pond where 
the lily pads were abundant; in the background 
was a bank of trees, mostly birch; beyond stood 


Photographing the Larger Animals 109 


Mount Katahdin in the misty distance; the 
moose was feeding in shallow water, the light 
was bright, and as the wind was in the right 
direction, everything pointed to a successful pic- 
ture. We were inacanoe; slowly and noiselessly 
we came through the smooth water; scarcely a 
ripple did the canoe make. Nearer and nearer, 
and still the bull had not seen us. When within 
about seventy feet (I was using a telephoto lens) 
I stood up slowly and quietly, while the animal 
was feeding. No sooner was I in position than 
he looked up. A finer picture could not be im- 
agined. His enormous antlers, still in velvet, 
seemed almost out of proportion to his size. And 
he stood absolutely still while I, trembling with 
excitement, focussed the camera and pressed the 
button. Instantly the huge beast made a dash 
for shore and in a second was lost to view, and I 
sat down congratulating myself upon having se- 
cured such a fine picture. Imagine my disgust 
when, on going to change the plate-holder, I dis- 
covered that in my excitement I had neglected to 
draw the slide. My chance was gone, and never 
again did such an opportunity present itself.” 

I quote this little tale simply to show how easily 
chances may escape us and excellent pictures be 
lost if we do not always keep our presence of 
mind. Double exposures, that is two exposures 
made on the same plate, is one of the commonest 


110 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


faults of the beginner. Every little detail must 
be thought of, and a good way to avoid these un- 
pleasant experiences is to have a regular routine 
of procedure, both before and after exposure, and 
never vary from it. If you do this regularly, it 
will soon become so much of a habit that you will 
do it unconsciously, and the chances of failure 
through having overlooked an important detail 
of procedure will be reduced to a minimum. 

In this work the ordinary tripod camera is of 
but little use, unless you are photographing from 
ambush, as, under the usual circumstances, by the 
time you have opened and set up your tripod, 
attached your camera, focussed, set the shutter, 
and inserted the plate-holder, the animal you had 
wished to photograph would be a mile or two away 
and “still running.” The only manner in which 
a tripod camera can be used successfully is by 
focussing from a well-screened ambush or “blind” 
upon some objective point (such as a salt lick) to 
which you may be reasonably certain the animal 
will come, and then waiting until he gets there. 

This can often be done successfully from a 
distance of twenty or thirty yards, or even far- 
ther, and, by the use of the telephoto lens, large 
images obtained. 

Sometimes, but not often, a deer, moose, or elk 
will be discovered standing knee-deep in some 
pond or grazing in some grassy opening, which, if 


Photographing the Larger Animals 111 


we approach with great caution to within fifty or 
seventy-five yards, will continue to be unconscious 
of our presence until we have had time to set up 
our camera and make several exposures. These 
are the chances that we must always be on the 
lookout for and of which we must always be 


Half-grown White-tailed Buck. 


ready to take advantage when they present 
themselves. 

I remember once, when hunting in the Adiron- 
dacks, that two deer waded into a pond not more 
than fifty yards from the spot where one of the 
party sat watching for them. They stood per- 
fectly motionless while he emptied the magazine 


112 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


of his rifle at them without hitting either one (it 
was afterwards discovered that the rear sight of 
the rifle had been inadvertently raised and every 
shot must have gone at least two feet over them). 
They did not seem to be in the least frightened 
by the noise of the shots and even remained 
where they were when he called to the next one 
of the party, who was some three or four hundred 
yards distant. They slowly waded from the pond, 
however, before he could reload his magazine, 
disappearing into the woods, and, for all I know, 
they are wandering around up there yet. 

Had he had a camera with him he would have 
had ample opportunity to make several exposures 
and would have obtained some invaluable photo- 
graphs, for the conditions were just right for 
good work, and it is very seldom that one has the 
chance to get the photographs of two deer on the 
same plate. 

This only shows that it is impossible to give 
any explicit directions as to the manner in which 
wild animals should be approached, for it all 
depends upon the individuality of the animal. 
Especially is this true of the deer tribe, for while 
some individuals will take fright before you have 
even sighted them, others will allow of a close 
approach, even though you may be in plain sight 
and with the wind blowing directly from you to 
them, and seem to be entirely indifferent to your 


Photographing the Larger Animals 113 


presence and dead to all sense of fear. It is best, 
however, never to risk a close approach until you 
have secured at least one negative, no matter at 
what distance, when the deer is first sighted; 
otherwise the opportunity of securing one of that 
particular animal may escape you altogether, and 
any picture of a deer or other wild animal, no 
matter how small the image may be, is of value, 
for it can always be enlarged. 

Ordinarily the reflex camera is the one to use 
and the one which will give the most and the best 
results. This should be fitted not only with an 
ordinary fast, long-focus lens, but with a telephoto 
lens as well. This latter should be one that is 
made especially for hand camera work, for, while 
it has a magnification of only three and a half 
diameters, still it works fast enough to allow of an 
exposure of at least 45 of a second in the strong 
sunlight, and even on a cloudy day exposures of 
from + to 745 of a second can be made with it and 
produce good results. 

Never use a short-focus lens in work upon 
animals, for it not only renders your subjects too 
small to be of much use, but, when close enough 
to make a fair-sized image, it is very difficult to 
prevent the distortion due to the exaggerated 
foreshortening that is a characteristic of this style 
of lens. Therefore, I should say, never use a lens 
of a shorter focal length than nine inches, and, of 

q 


114. Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


course, as much longer than this as you desire. 
The longer the better. 

In selecting your camera and apparatus for this 
work, strength should be the first consideration, 
for, in the trips over exceedingly rough country, 
which you will be obliged to take, it will receive 
some hard knocks. Especial care should be 
taken in the selection of plate-holders, and all 
those that are at all flimsy in their construction 
should be discarded. But all this I have spoken 
of in the chapter on apparatus, and it is only 
necessary to add here that in this particular 
branch the outfit will be liable to be subjected 
to the severest tests and therefore greater care 
should be exercised in its selection for this work 
than for any other, or otherwise many exposures 
will be lost. 

When out looking for subjects in the woods 
and, especially, when following up watercourses 
in a boat or canoe, always have your reflex in 
your hands with the plate-holder inserted, the 
shutter set, and everything in readiness for instant 
use, for you can never tell when you may get a 
chance for an exposure. 

Once, in Florida, when going up the Miami 
River in a canoe, on rounding a sharp bend I sud- 
denly came upon a deer drinking at the edge of 
the water. He was not over twenty-five yards 
from me, and as he heard the swish of my paddle 


Photographing the Larger Animals 115 


he raised his head and stood absolutely motion- 
less for as much as two or three minutes while I 
let the canoe drift. His surprise and curiosity 
were evidently greater than his fear, and he made 
a beautiful picture as he stood against the back- 
ground of green foliage, his whole body reflected 
in the clear water, in which he stood knee-deep; 
but, as the canoe continued to drift closer to him, 
he suddenly turned and bounded off into the 
woods and out of sight, leaving in my mind 
an impression of as pretty a little scene in wild 
life as it had ever been my good fortune to look 
upon. 

At another time, as I was passing through a 
piece of “hammock” at Cape Sable (the southern- 
most point of Florida), a lynx, which seemed to 
me the biggest one I had ever seen, jumped from 
the low inarliciers at my very feet and, springing 
upon a fallen tree not over ten feet distant, stood 
there growling, his back partly toward me and 
his head turned over his shoulder. It made a 
splendid study of natural wild life, and one which 
I stopped to admire. I would have given much 
to have been able to obtain a negative of him as 
he stood there in all the magnificence of his 
assumed anger, but, unfortunately for me, I did 
not have a camera with me on either one of 
these occasions, and so two unique opportunities 
were lost. 


116 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


One never knows when such opportunities will 
present themselves, and, if you would obtain pic- 
tures that you might look in vain to have re- 
peated, you must always be in readiness for 
whatever may happen. 

Some remarkably effective pictures can be 


White-tailed Deer. Doe. 


made of deer at night by means of the “ firelight- 
ing” methods, with which all sportsmen are 
familiar. This consists in rowing quietly around 
the edges of some pond frequented by deer and 
flashing a light, reflected from a mirror or other 
highly polished surface into the dark places. 
When this light is flashed into the eyes of a deer, 


Photographing the Larger Animals 117 


it dazzles him to such an extent that he can see 
nothing else, and, in consequence, he will stand 
absolutely still, staring at it. 

It is generally considered a somewhat unsports- 
manlike way of hunting these creatures, as it gives 
them but little chance for their lives; and, in most 
places, it is prohibited by the game laws. It is, 
however, an excellent method of taking their 
photographs. Of course a “ flash-light” must be 
used, and it needs two people to work success- 
fully, one to manipulate the search- and flash-light 
and the other to do the photographing. The 
camera must be one of the “ fixed focus ” variety 
or else set for the focus of a certain distance and 
the exposure made when, in the judgment of the 
operator, he is at that distance from his subject, 
for it is impossible to see to focus in the dark 
even when a strong light is reflected upon the 
object. 

Another way of photographing by means of 
the flash-light is to set up the camera focussed on 
a deer’s runway and insert the plate-holder, with 
the slide drawn, after dark, leaving the shutter 
open. Set up the flash gun by the side of the 
camera so that the deer may discharge it himself 
by means of a string stretched across the runway 
at the point upon which you have focussed. The 
flash powder in the gun should be protected from 


the damp by covering it with a piece of oiled 


118 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


paper. This will not prevent it from exploding 
when the trigger is pulled, but will protect it from 
the dew, which would otherwise dampen it to 
such an extent that it would not ignite. The 
slide of the plate-holder must always be replaced 
before daylight, otherwise the plate would be 
overexposed, besides giving a conglomerate pic- 
ture of foliage showing through the deer’s image. 

If one is ingenious enough, an arrangement of 
strings can be made that will release the shutter 
at the same time that it fires the flash gun, thus 
obviating the necessity of leaving the plate ex- 
posed. 

This method of flash-light photography is some- 
what uncertain, but often gives good results. Mr. 
Shiras of Pittsburg has done some really remark- 
able work by both of these methods, and where it 
has once been done it certainly can be repeated. 

A considerable amount of flash powder must be 
used, especially in the former method, for the dis- 
tance and space to be illuminated are considerable, 
and it is remarkable how much more light is ab- 
sorbed in the open than in a confined space, such 
as a room. The proper amount will be ascer- 
tained after one or two experiments. 

These methods of forcing the animal to photo- 
graph itself are often productive of astonishing 
results. Once a friend of mine had fixed his ap- 
paratus at nightfall, and upon examining it in the 


Photographing the Larger Animals — 119 


morning and finding that the flash had been ex- 
ploded he naturally concluded that he had a nega- 
tive of a deer. Much to his surprise, however, 
when he came to develop it, it turned out to be 
an excellent picture of a porcupine. To avoid 
having the smaller animals spring the “gun,” 
when you do not wish their photographs, the 
string should be placed at such a height that they 
may pass beneath it. 

Photographs of swimming caribou are easily 
obtainable, — especially in Newfoundland, where 
these animals are still plentiful and are lable to 
remain so for some time to come, owing to the 
restrictions of a sensible game law that will not 
allow indiscriminate and continuous shooting, 
even in the open season. These animals, as well 
as almost any other for that matter, are practically 
incapable of defending themselves while in the 
water, although they are strong swimmers. They 
can, therefore, be followed up at one’s will in a 
canoe, and any number of “shots” be made at 
them with the reflex camera. 

If you know of the whereabouts of a “ yard” of 
any of the deer family in the winter time, you can 
have an opportunity such as is not often vouch- 
safed to one for obtaining a long series of pictures 
of them, and such an opportunity should never be 
missed by any one who can take advantage of it. 

In the summer time a salt lick is a place pro- 


120 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


ductive of good results and should be watched al- 
most constantly. As any old hunter knows, such 
a place can be made by salting an old stump, in a 
deer-frequented place, with rock salt, repeatedly. 
They will soon get to know of it and will come 
there regularly to find it. 

In the early spring deer come into the open 
to feed more frequently than at any other season, 
as at this time the sprouts have not yet begun to 
appear in the woods, while things are fairly green 
in the open places, and consequently they can 
find more to their liking in these places than in 
the deeper woods. They then offer many good 
opportunities for pictures to any one who is ready 
for them. This is the time when a tripod camera, 
used from an ambush, can best be employed. 

But sportsmen undoubtedly know these and 
many other habits of the Deer family much better 
than I can teach them, and so it is simply wasting 
time and space for me to enumerate the different 
places where one should hunt. 

Mr. Wallihan, as I have before mentioned, 
hunts his cougar with a pack of hounds, running 
them until they are treed. This has the disad- 
vantage of nearly always forcing your cat into a 
tree, for it is very seldom that they will take a 
stand on the ground. It is the only way of get- 
ting close to them, however, unless you do as Mr. 
Carlin did with his lynxes and first trap them. 


Photographing the Larger Animals — 121 


While with the latter method better pictures 
can probably be obtained with less danger to the 
operator, the former has more of the element of 
excitement in it and adds the pleasures of a stern 
chase to those of photographing, and this, to any 
one of true sportsman proclivities, counts as not 
the least of the reasons for hunting. 

Photographs of the Rocky Mountain sheep are 
very scarce, but such as have been taken are ex- 
ceedingly interesting. Owing to the extreme 
shyness of the animals and the almost inaccessible 
places which they frequent, they are difficult to 
approach to within even the distance of a rifle- 
shot, but by the use of the high-power telephoto 
lens good pictures of them may be obtained by 
patience and perseverance. 

Bears, in their absolute wild state, are prob- 
ably the most difficult of any of the wild animals 
to photograph; but in the Yellowstone Park they 
can be closely approached without danger, for, ow- 
ing to the fact that all the animals in this place 
are most carefully protected and shooting not al- 
lowed, they have no fear of man, and, fortunately, 
while guns of any sort are prohibited in the park, 
cameras are not, and one may hunt with them to 
his heart’s desire. 

In work on the large animals, necessitating, as 
it does, long trips afield, I should not advise the 
use of the orthochromatic plates, for, although 


122 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


they undoubtedly give much better results than 
do any other kind, they have not the keeping 
qualities of the ordinary plate, and, especially when 
they cannot be kept free from the least dampness, 
as it would be almost impossible to do on a camp- 
ing trip, they deteriorate very rapidly. Moreover, 
they are not quite so rapid as are the fastest ordi- 
nary plates, and speed is one of the first essentials 
for animal work. 

In “ packing” into camp and at all times while 
there, the camera and outfit should be the one thing 
to be most carefully protected against accident ; 
for even the best and strongest are easily dam- 
aged, and this damage may be such as cannot be 
remedied and the results of a whole trip thereby 
forfeited. I have known of several instances 
where this has happened through sheer careless- 
ness, and one cannot afford to treat his outfit with 
anything but the greatest consideration. 

The one great thing to remember in photograph- 
ing all wild animals is to get them in as natural 
and unconstrained an attitude as is possible. This 
can best be done when they are caught unawares, 
for they are apt to be more or less frightened when 
they realize that something is being done with 
them and this fright will inevitably show in the 
picture, either in an unnatural pose or in some 
other unmistakable manner, 


CHAPTER VIII 
PHOTOGRAPHING THE SMALLER MAMMALS 


Here is a field in which, while the possibilities 
for excitement are not so great as they are in 
work with the larger animals, the chances for 
pictures are greater. It is a field, however, in 
which a knowledge of the habits of the sub- 
jects is, in most cases, much more necessary than 
in any other. 

Should one attempt to hunt for the smaller crea- 
tures without a fairly accurate knowledge of their 
daily lives, he might tramp the woods or fields for 
weeks and find nothing but the squirrels and chip- 
munks while, unawares, he has passed time and 
again within a few feet of some tiny fur-bearer 
watching him with inquisitive black eyes in fear 
and trembling. 

One never realizes the immense army of small 
mammals, especially of the Rodent family (the 
mice, rats, squirrels, etc.), that inhabits our woods 
and fields, until he starts to look for them. They 
are innumerable, but, as they are abroad princi- 
pally at night, one who is not well versed in their 


123 


124 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


ways may never have the good fortune to see 
one. 

The red and gray squirrels and the chipmunks 
we all know, for they are the inquisitive busy- 
bodies of the woods, and nothing delights them 
more than to scold at an intruder upon what 


Prairie Dog at Entrance to Burrow. 


they are pleased to consider their especial reserve. 
But these form the smallest part of this army. 
The mice, of which there are many species be- 
sides the common one whose acquaintance we 
have made through its habit of using our dwell- 
ing-places as its home, are numerous everywhere. 
There is probably hardly a meadow that does not 


Photographing the Smaller Mammals 125 


harbor at least several hundred of these little 
fellows, and yet, except for an occasional squeak 
and rustle in the grass, we may never know of 
their presence. 

Let us look beneath the tangled grass and we 
will find their narrow but well-defined “run- 
ways” stretching in every direction, intersecting 
and crossing 
each other, 
until we dis- 
cover that the 
field is a veri- 
table network 
of these mini- 
ature road- 
ways, and that 
there is a pop- 
ulation and a 
busy life be- 
neath our feet of which we have heretofore known 
nothing. Follow one of these “run-ways.” It 
may lead nowhere and it may lead to the maker's 
home: a small, round bunch of dead grass, well 
woven together, half sunken in the ground and 
thoroughly concealed by the tangle of grass and 
herbage above. If we approach carefully, we may 
be fortunate enough to catch the owner at home, 
coiled up in the soft, warm interior, taking his 
midday sleep, but we must be quick or he will 


Cotton Mouse. 


126 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


slip out and away before we can even catch a 
glimpse of him. 

Should we be lucky enough to capture him, 
however, we can take both him and his nest 
home with us and photograph them at our 
leisure. 

As it is an exceedingly difficult thing to restrict 
the range of any of the smaller mammals so 
as to get satisfactory photographs of them, it is 
sometimes best to photograph them in captivity. 
This can be done successfully by the use of a 
glass cage. The front, sides, and top should be 
of glass and the bottom and back of wood, covered 
inside with tin so that the occupant cannot gnaw 
his way through. Inside of this cage we may 
arrange what accessories we wish and place our 
captive. At first he will be very wild, and we 
shall be able to do nothing with him; but after a 
while, as he becomes somewhat better acquainted 
with his surroundings, he will quiet down and 
will assume the attitudes we wish. 

In order to escape reflection on the glass the 
cage should be so placed that the sun’s rays strike 
it full, and even then it is best not to use a black 
background. 

If there is the least possibility of our being 
able to do so, it is always desirable to at least 
attempt the photographing of even these small 
mammals wild and in their native haunts, as both 


Photographing the Smaller Mammals 127 


the animals and their surroundings are bound to 
look much more natural under these conditions. 

It can be accomplished, and successfully, if one 
is willing to use his time and exercise his patience, 
with either the reflex or the tripod camera. ‘The 
latter can usually be used to better advantage, 
however, and the methods followed are much the 
same as when photographing birds at their nests. 

Nearly all of 
the smaller 
mammals are in 
the habit of us- 
ing one particu- 
lar stump or 
rock as a place 
of observation 
from which to 
survey the land 
before ventur- 
ing forth. By 
carefully watching for several days, this vantage 
point may generally be discovered. If not then, 
we may get them into the habit of coming to 
such a spot by baiting it for several days with 
something to their liking. This will work most 
successfully if we select a spot in close prox- 
imity to their nest. After they have become 
accustomed to coming to look for the bait, then 
we can set up our camera, focus it upon the 


a 


Fox Squirrel. 


128 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


spot we have baited, screen it well so that it 
will be invisible to the sharp, inquisitive eyes of 
our sitter, and, with ourselves hidden at the end of 
seventy-five or one hundred feet of the rubber 
tubing, wait for our subject to put in his appear- 
ance. Whether we obtain a picture or not 
depends entirely upon our ability to wait patiently 
and quietly for an indefinite period. The one 
absolutely necessary precaution is quietness. 
The smaller mammals are easily frightened by 
any unexpected movement or noise, and slight 
carelessness on the part of the operator will often 
cause them to leave and not return for a number 
of hours, if, indeed, they will do so again that 
same day, 

Mr. Carlin, using this method, did some remark- 
able work on the small mammals of the Bitter Root 
Mountains. Among these he secured several fine 
pictures of the Rocky Mountain pika, or, as it is 
locally called, the little chief hare. These are 
the only photographs, of which I know, that have 
ever been secured of this interesting little animal. 
Of him Mr. Carlin says: “He lives in certain 
parts of the Rocky Mountain system among the 
great masses of broken slide rock, and in many 
ways is one of the most interesting little animals 
on our continent. In the lower altitudes, say 
about four thousand feet, he is out and about a 
good deal of the winter, but in the high altitudes, 


Photographing the Smaller Mammals 129 


from six thousand to nine thousand feet, his home 
is buried under from ten to fifty feet of snow and 
he does not make his appearance until June or 
July. When he first comes out, he is rather lazy 
and likes to sit and sun himself. Later on he is 
seldom quiet for any length of time excepting in 
the early morning. He has many household duties 
and begins early in August to gather in his sup- 
ply of winter hay, for the snow and frosts come 
early up where he lives. If you are watching by 
a pile of rocks, you will see him pop suddenly out 
of some crevasse, look hurriedly around to see 
that the coast is clear of any prowling weasel or 
hawk, and, after uttering his peculiar little cry, he 
will scamper over the broken masses of rock with 
incredible swiftness to his favorite ‘hayfield, 
where he gathers a large mouthful and hurries 
back to arrange a little haycock where his grass 
will dry protected from the winds. He works 
incessantly and, should a storm threaten, he will 
work all night, if necessary, to gather in his hay- 
cocks to one of the common storehouses under 
the rocks. In photographing him the camera was 
focussed on his favorite sunning place, partially 
hidden by leaves and weeds, while I sat fifty feet 
away and waited his appearance. I worked on 
and off for over a month before I got his picture.” 

This evidences an amount of patience and per- 
severance that was deserving of the reward that 

K 


130 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


he obtained, the only photographs of the pika in 
existence; and there is probably no one who now 
knows the habits of this little mammal better 
than does Mr. Carlin. 

He also obtained, while on this same trip, a 
photograph of a weasel as he was about to leave 
his home among the rocks, and that weasel shows 
all too 
plainly in 
his picture 
that he was 
not caught 
asleep. 

Many of 
the animals 
that. live 
in holes in 
the ground, 
Sitch eas 
woodchucks, gophers, etc., can be successfully 
photographed by focussing upon the entrance to 
their burrows and waiting for them to come out. 
This sometimes necessitates a long wait, but 
makes most interesting pictures as showing both 
the animal and the place in which he lives. 

The ’possum is, probably, the easiest of all the 
small mammals to photograph, as his slowness of 
movement makes it possible to catch him and he 
can be handled without danger of his attempting 


Half-grown Woodchuck. 


Photographing the Smaller Mammals 131 


to bite. His first act, when he is approached, is 
not to try to escape, but to feign death or “play 
possum.” During this stage of the proceedings 
he is most tantalizing, for no amount of poking 
will cause him to show any sign of life. He may 
be picked up, and to do so by his tail is the only 
natural way, and placed in the crotch or on the 
branch of a tree or in any other elevated position ; 
but he will not attempt to hold himself there, 
rolling immediately off and falling to the ground 
with a resounding thud, apparently lifeless. No 
falls of this kind, no matter from what height, 
appear to injure him in the least, for he is the 
toughest of all our animals and will receive any 
amount of hard knocks or blows with seeming 
indifference. Pay no attention to him, however, 
and he will soon slowly open his eyes, and, if he 
thinks he is not observed, will begin cautiously to 
move away and try, by stealth, to get out of 
sight before he is detected. When he learns 
that his “playing ’possum” is not benefiting him 
he will wake up, and then one can have no better 
subject. By the aid of the reflex or even with 
the ordinary outfit one can then easily photograph 
him in any position he may desire. 

The porcupine makes another easy subject, 
although he cannot be handled with impunity if 
one would not have his hand made into the ap- 
pearance of a pincushion by his sharp, barbed 


132 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


quills. Moreover, if we try to influence his 
movements to any extent, by urging him either 
with our foot or a stick, the endeavor is invariably 
attended by a loss of many of his quills, and with- 
out these he presents a sorry appearance and is 
not worthy of being photographed. These quills 
form his only means of defence, for, although he 
will chatter vindictively with his teeth, he will 
seldom bite. The bridge of his nose is his one 
vulnerable spot, and when that is struck a sharp 
blow it will generally kill him. Knowing this, 
as he must, he will, when approached, invariably 
turn his head downward, and, with his nose well 
buried in the fur of his chest and every quill 
standing erect, he will lash about with his tail, 
and wherever this formidable weapon strikes it 
leaves a number of tiny javelins which are as 
sharp as needles and so barbed that they are not 
easily extracted. 

In this manner he has been known to kill even 
such large animals as wildcats by driving his tail 
quills into their eyes and thus penetrating to 
their brain. From this fact most wild animals 
know enough to leave him alone and will always 
give him the road except when driven to extremi- 
ties by hunger. He is stubborn, and when in 
the position of defence no amount of prodding 
will elicit anything but a continued lashing of the 
tail. The only thing to do is to wait patiently 


Photographing the 


Smaller Mammals 


133 


Porcupine feeding on Root. 


134 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


until he decides to move and then follow him 
with the camera until he assumes such attitudes 
as may satisfy us from a photographic standpoint. 

The raccoon is an interesting and usually well- 
behaved subject, but is not so easy to capture. 
When handling him we must look out for his 
teeth, for he 
knows. well 
how to use 
them and 
can inflict 
very painful 
wounds. 

In any 
park or pri- 
vate grounds 
where there 
are gray 
squirrels they are usually more or less tame 
and easily approached. In Central Park, New 
York City, there are thousands, and they are so 
tame through never having been molested that 
they will not only fearlessly come close to a per- 
son, but will even go so far as to explore his 
pockets for nuts. These are excellent subjects 
for the beginner to try his hand on, for he can 
always get his squirrel to come to the spot he 
has focussed upon by placing a peanut there. 

In all this work the ordinary long-focus outfit is 


Muskrat. 


Photographing the Smaller Mammals — 135 


the best to use. Of course the reflex will fre- 
quently be needed and the telephoto lens often be 
found indispensable, but the ordinary camera is 
the one that is most frequently called into service. 
In this, as well as the other branches, the two 
indispensable requisites are perseverance and pa- 
tience, as was proved by Mr. Carlin’s experience 
which I have related. Of the latter luxury one 
needs, perhaps, more in this branch than in any 
other, unless he is photographing his animals 
in captivity, and 
he must be sup- L 
plied with con- ae 
siderable more 
than the usual 
amount with 


which man is 
blessed, for it 
will sometimes 
be necessary 
for him to sit 
motionless for 
hours ere he will succeed in obtaining the picture 
for which he is striving. 

Animals, especially the smaller ones, are natu- 
rally extremely timid and shy, and the mere pres- 
ence of man will often cause them to remain in 
concealment for an interminable length of time. 

From the fact of the extreme difficulty with 


Little Brown Bat Asleep. 


136 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


which good photographs of any of these smaller 
animals, especially the rodents, are obtained in the 
open, I am more in favor of the use of a cage 
in this branch than in any other. If one is care- 
ful in the placing of the accessories, very natural 
surroundings can be arranged and the resulting 
picture be excellent, but always make these acces- 
sories conform with the nature of the habitat of 
the subject and, above all, never make the expos- 
ure when the animal shows the least sign of fear 
either in pose or expression. It is best, therefore, 
to keep him in the cage for two or three days, un- 
til he becomes thoroughly accustomed to his new 
home, before trying to photograph him. Often, 
with mice, if we put some grass and other like 
material in the cage, they will construct a nest, 
and this always adds a note of naturalness to the 
picture. 

Shrews, moles, etc., are easier subjects than are 
the mice. The only trouble that I have experi- 
enced in photographing moles is the fact that in 
the photograph they always appear to be dead. 
This is because they have no eyes, and eyes are 
the things that do more than anything else to 
show life in a picture. 

The white-footed mouse often makes its home 
in a deserted woodpecker’s hole, and if we can find 
one of these nests and capture the inmate, we can 
remove the branch and take the home as well as 


Photographing the Smaller Mammals 137 


its owner away with us to the cage and we shall 
need no other accessories. 

Beaver are not difficult to photograph if we can 
find one of their villages, but they are rapidly 
diminishing in numbers and bid fair soon to be- 
come extinct. 

The first and the final word of advice which I 
have to give is: know your subjects. Otherwise 
the difficulties will be increased tenfold and many 
opportunities will be entirely lost. 


GCriAr TE Rex 
PHOTOGRAPHING BIRDS’ NESTS 


UnpoustEepLy the easiest branch of nature 
photography, and yet one in which there are 
many difficulties to be overcome, is the photo- 
graphing of birds’ nests. It offers more possibili- 
ties for really artistic results than does any other 
branch, with the exception of flower photography ; 
and, if we study our subject well before making 
an exposure, to discover from what point of view 
the best lighting and general effect is obtain- 
able, the resulting picture will often be a thing of 
beauty that may well call for the admiration of 
all who see it. 

Therefore we should be in no hurry when 
photographing a bird’s nest, for it will not run or 
fly away and we can take our time. Look at it 
and study it from every direction, through the 
camera, for one is better able to judge how a thing 
will look in the picture by seeing it upon the 
ground glass than by looking at it as it appears 
naturally. When we have decided from which 
direction it makes the best appearance, then is the 

138 


Photographing Birds’ Nests 139 


time to make the exposure, but not before. In 
other words, give what artistic ability we may 
possess full sway in this field, for with most 
nature work art must take a back seat, while in 
this branch it can be successfully employed, by 
any one who is capable of doing so, to the oft- 
times great improvement of the picture. 

All this, of course, applies only to such nests 
as are built in low bushes or upon the ground. 
Those that are placed in trees, on the ledges of 
cliffs, and in like inaccessible places, can usually 
be photographed from but one direction if, indeed, 
we can get at them at all, and we may consider 
ourselves lucky to obtain the picture without 
troubling much about the artistic quality of it. 

It must be remembered, primarily, that a 
picture of a bird’s nest, to be of any value, scientifi- 
cally or otherwise, must show as much as is pos- 
sible of its surroundings and also the detail of its 
construction and the manner in which it is fast- 
ened to its support. In order to do this, so as to 
obtain the best and most natural results, the nest 
should always be photographed zz sz¢u, and this, 
as can readily be seen, often presents great diff- 
culties, the overcoming of which affords one of the 
chief pleasures of the work to any one who is seri- 
ously interested in it. 

The nests that are built on or near the ground 
present an easy mark, but those that are high up 


140 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


among the branches of the trees and particularly, 
as frequently happens, when they are at the extrem- 
ity of some branch, these are the ones that tax 
the ingenuity of the operator to the utmost limit. 

Another particular in which we must exercise 
the greatest care is the arrangement of the sur- 


Nest and Eggs of Ruffed Grouse. 


roundings. It will be often found necessary to 
remove some of the branches, leaves, or grass from 
in front of the nest, so as to obtain a clear, unob- 
structed view of it and its contents. In doing this 
we should be most particular not to remove too 
much, for if this is done it will give the effect of 
bareness in the photograph, besides leaving the 


Photographing Birds’ Nests 141 


nest unprotected when we are done with it and 
causing the bird to desert. It is best, therefore, 
when possible, to bend back the branches or other 
herbage instead of cutting them off, so that they 
may be returned to their former position when we 
are through. Where it is necessary to cut a twig 
the end should be hidden by a leaf, or in some 
other manner, so that it will not show in the pic- 
ture. Touch the nest and eggs as seldom as pos- 
sible, for the natural set and arrangement of it is 
one of the important features and this is easily 
disturbed; besides, a bird will frequently refuse to 
return to a nest that has been handled. We 
should always try to avoid doing anything that 
will drive the birds from their nests. Remember 
that they have a greater right to them than have 
we, and then, too, we may wish to use them again 
later when the eggs have hatched and the old 
birds are feeding their young. 

The nest photographer's outfit consists of a 
four by five long-focus camera; any ordinary 
lens (those of the longer focal lengths are best) ; 
the long and the short legged tripods; the ball- 
and-socket clamp; the large mirror and a pair of 
climbing irons. A pair of pruning shears will be 
found a useful adjunct also, for with them twigs 
can be clipped with less jar to the nest than with 
a knife. 

This may seem to be a formidable outfit, but one 


142 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


can hardly work satisfactorily with less, and some- 
times even other accessories will be found neces- 
sary, such as a screening cloth, a small keyhole 
saw, etc. 

Now let us make our first photograph of a nest, 
and it will be best for our first endeavor to be 
upon some low-built nest. The sandpiper’s nest 


Nest and Eggs of Green Heron. 
Photographed twenty-five feet from ground. 

(a photograph of which is shown on page 143) is 

a good type of the ground nest and is an easy 

one to begin our work upon. 

One of the things we must always avoid, if pos- 
sible, is having the camera pointed directly down- 
ward at a nest. It not only shows the nest in an 
entirely false position, but also gives little idea of 
its form or construction. 

Having found our nest and selected the point 


Photographing Birds’ Nests 143 


of view from which it can be photographed to the 
best advantage, we first press back or cut away 
all the intervening foliage that obstructs the view 
of it. Then the camera is set up on the short 
tripod at a distance of about three feet from and 


md 


don Sah Se ags a 
gg el ES 


Nest and Eggs of Spotted Sandpiper. 


pointing slightly downward at thenest. This will 
allow a view of a part of its inner as well as most 
of its outer construction, and the picture will carry 
to the mind of the person who sees ita correct idea 
of the manner in which it is built, which would 
not be the case if the camera was pointed directly 
downward at it. It is not necessary to show all 


144 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


the eggs, although some people seem to think so, 
but if two or three of them show above the rim of 
the nest it is sufficient. When the nest 1s so deep 
that the eggs are entirely hidden, a small tuft of 
cotton may be carefully inserted beneath them. 
This will raise them into view and will not, as 
may seem probable, give a false idea of their posi- 
tion in the nest. Care must be taken, however, 
that none of the cotton shows. 

When the camera is set up at the required dis- 
tance, and all the intervening foliage fixed to our 
satisfaction, we must focus upon the rim of the 
nest nearest to the camera, regardless of all the 
surroundings. Then by the use of the swing- 
back it will be found that much of the foreground 
and background will be sharpened up, but it will 
still be necessary to stop down the lens, sometimes 
to its fullest extent, before all the surround- 
ings are brought into as sharp focus as is desir- 
able. This, naturally, means a long exposure, 
which is a drawback when the wind is blowing, 
so that it is best, when we can, to work on a calm 
day. 

Try not to underexpose, as the results have a 
distinctly disagreeable hardness, showing the eggs 
as blotches of white against a black background. 
Much better to err on the side of over exposure, as 
this fault can be corrected in development. 

Never make an exposure in the direct sunlight, 


Photographing Birds’ Nests 145 


for that also gives too contrasty a negative with 
no delicate half-tones and poor detail. If the nest 
is not already in the shade, where no patches of 
sunlight fall upon it, then it must be shaded by 
holding the focussing cloth, a coat, or some other 
screen between it and the sun. Be careful, 
though, that the screen does not show in the 
picture. 

As can be seen from the foregoing, the ideal day 
for nest photography is one that is calm and with 
the sky slightly overcast; but this we cannot always 
have, nor would we entirely desire it, so we must 
meet the emergencies as we find them. I have 
done some excellent work in the pouring rain, but 
this is hard on the camera unless it is thoroughly 
protected, and the raindrops collected on the 
foliage will show, and, even though shaken off 
just before the exposure, are bound to collect 
again before it is over. 

If the nest itself should be in a dark place 
while its immediate surroundings are comparatively 
well lighted, as will sometimes be found to be the 
case, we can overcome the difficulty by the use of 
the mirror. For instance, should we conclude 
that about a minute would be the correct expos- 
ure for the surroundings with the lens stopped 
well down, then, with the mirror, throw a shaft of 
light upon the nest for say from six to ten seconds 
about the middle of the exposure, but be careful 

L 


146 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


to keep the mirror moving so that no part of the 
nest will be, better illuminated than another. 

So much for the ground builders. The nests 
placed from one to five feet from the ground are 
the most satisfactory to work upon. They are 
easy to get at, generally require but little pre- 
. liminary preparation 
or arrangement, and 
they offer, from the 
nature of their sur- 
roundings, far better 
possibilities for fine 
results than do the 
ones that are placed 
either high up in the 
trees or on the ground. 

The tripod should 
be made sufficiently 
long to elevate the 
camera from six inches 
to a foot above the 
level of the nest and so tilted as to point the 
lens diagonally downward at it. Should the nest 
be placed so high up in a bush, too small to bear 
a person’s weight, as to make it impossible to 
reach it by the aid of the ordinary tripod, sticks 
must be cut and bound tightly to the legs of the 
tripod, thus lengthening them to the desired ex- 
tent. Upon several occasions I have made my tri- 


Nest and Eggs of Chestnut-sided 
Warbler in Low Bush. 


Photographing Birds’ Nests 147 


pod legs at least ten feet long in this manner and 
have done my focussing while standing upon the 
shoulders of an assistant. This may séem hard on 
the assistant, but it is better than carrying a step- 
ladder to the site of the nest, although .I should 
advise the use of an assistant with a good pair of 
shoulders, especially should you be of some weight 
yourself; otherwise you may take a hasty tumble to 
earth in the midst of the focussing and will be 
more or less likely to bring the camera down with 
you in your fall, which would benefit neither you 
nor your camera. 

All the advice given for me lighting and ar- 
rangement of the saan nests Sha Ins followed 
here, although when working in the manner I have 
just described it will be found impossible to shade 
the nest; but in such cases, when the nest is not in 
the shade of some other tree or bush, wait, if you 
can, until some passing cloud obscures the sun long 
enough for you to make the desired exposure. 

Mr. Dugmore advocates the use, in some 
instances, of a white screen placed beneath the 
nest, so as to reflect light on the under side of it. 
This, he says, “may easily be done by taking a 
yard or two of white muslin and fastening a stick 
at each end. The sticks should be pointed at one 
end so that they may be put into the ground, and 
the cloth, tightly stretched, will be held at such 
an angle that the light will reflect from it upon 


148 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


the nest.” This may be advantageous at times. 
I have never used it, as I have never found it 
necessary; moreover I am inclined to believe 
that it would give false lighting, as the under 
part of a nest is naturally more shaded than the 
upper and should so appear in a picture. 

It will be found difficult and often impossible to 
give as long an exposure with these bush nests as 
with those built on the ground and, consequently, 
the lens cannot, generally, be stopped down so 
far. Therefore greater care must be exercised in 
the focussing and the use of the swing-back to 
get all the surroundings in as sharp focus as pos- 
sible. The slightest breath of air will often sway 
the supports of the nest sufficiently to spoil all the 
sharpness of outline, and when there is much of a 
wind blowing they are seldom entirely still for 
more than two or three consecutive seconds. It 
is very annoying, to say the least, to see the nest 
move just in the middle of an exposure and to 
realize that the picture is spoiled and we must try 
it over again. This can sometimes be obviated 
by means of guy ropes of stout twine fastened in 
several directions to stationary objects. 

In cases of nests swung at the ends of branches, 
such as vireos’, orioles’, etc., if they are not more 
than ten or twelve feet above the ground, the 
branch can usually be bent down and fastened in 
the desired position with twine; but in doing this 


Photographing Birds’ Nests 149 


be sure to prop up the end of the branch so that 
the nest will be in its original horizontal position. 
Above all things never remove the nest from its 
site, except when absolutely necessary, either by 
taking it from the crotch or other situation in 
which it was placed by the birds and placing it in 
another more convenient, or by removing it and 
its support bod- 
ily to where it 
can be more 
easily photo- 
graphed. To 
do this is, I 
know, a great 
temptation — to 
all photogra- 
phers, but the 
resultsarenever 


Nest and Eggs of Kingbird. 
as satisfactory. Photographed in topmost branches of apple tree. 


The value of a 


nest picture, from a scientific point of view, lies 
largely in the fact that it is an exact representation 
of the nest in precisely the position that the bird 
built it with all its natural surroundings intact; 
and, no matter how careful we may be to arrange 
it after its removal, it is not the same, and the man 
who knows the nests and the manner of their con- 
struction can almost always detect the difference. 
Moreover it despoils the birds of their home, for 


150 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


very few birds will return to a nest that has once 
been removed from the spot in which they built 
it, although it may be replaced, with the greatest 
care, in the original site. 

In arranging the eggs, too, when such arrange- 
ment is necessary, care should be taken to put 
them in the same position as they were left by the 
bird. The position in which an egg hes often 
counts for much, as, for instance, in pointed eggs 
the small ends are always together, never pointing 
outward. 

It is permissible, and sometimes even desirable, 
to introduce some accessories to the picture by 
placing objects near the nests that were not origi- 
nally there. These objects should never be incon- 
gruous, however, with the other surroundings, and 
should only be placed there to illustrate some 
point. Thus, I have often placed some flower 
near a nest to show that that flower was in bloom 
at the time the nest was built, but it must always 
be some flower that is found blooming in the 
immediate proximity of the nesting site. This 
also serves to give an idea of the locality in which 
a nest is found, as the wild raspberry bloom near 
the nest of a hooded warbler or indigo bunting, 
for both of these birds are partial to this plant as 
a nesting site; or the false hellebore, placed near 
the nest of a Wilson’s thrush, as both flower and 
nest are found in low, swampy places, An old 


Photographing Birds’ Nests ist 


chestnut bur near an ovenbird’s nest will show 
that it is built in the woods, and a clover head by 
the side of a bobolink’s home will tell any one 
that the lush clover fields are the places in which 
this bird delights to breed. Thus the judicious 
introduction of new objects in the immediate sur- 
roundings of the nest is, as I have said, entirely 
permissible, and they not only serve the purposes 
I have stated, but also greatly enhance the beauty 
of the picture. 

As for the size that the image of the nest 
should be, that is a matter for the judgment of 
the operator. I, myself, do not favor the nest 
occupying too much of the plate, for I think that 
the more of the surroundings that are shown the 
better, so long as the nest shows large enough to 
bring out clearly the details of its construction 
and the markings on the eggs. To show dis- 
tinctly the shape and markings of the eggs is im- 
portant, for they must be capable of showing for 
themselves that they belong in the nest and are 
not merely any eggs photographed in any nest. 

When it comes to photographing the nests of 
the tree builders, especially those that build in 
the very tallest trees, the hawks, crows, eagles, 
etc., the problem immediately becomes much 
more difficult and, in many instances, unsolvable. 
Many times it is necessary, however, to work in 
the tree-tops, and much good work has already 


152 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


Nest and Eggs of American Crow. 


Photographed fifty feet above ground. 


Photographing Birds’ Nests 163 


been done there; but I would not advise any but 
those who are perfectly level-headed and sure- 
footed, in other words good climbers, to try it, for 
the situations are often dangerous, necessitating, 
as they do, the use of both hands for the manipu- 
lation of the camera, and thus leaving to the legs 
and feet alone the duty of holding one in the tree. 

Two methods can be used for securing the 
camera in the tree. The tripod can be lashed 
securely to several of the limbs or branches, or the 
camera can be fastened directly to one of them by 
means of the ball-and-socket clamp. The latter 
method is by far the easiest and most satisfactory, 
although upon some occasions it will be found 
necessary to employ the former. 

The same general directions hold good here 
concerning the surroundings of the nest, except 
that a greater number of leaves in the foreground 
will have to be removed in most cases. This is 
owing to the fact that the slightest breeze will 
often sway not only the branch upon which the 
nest is built, but also the one upon which the 
camera is fastened, and this is ruination to all 
sharpness of outline in the picture. Guy ropes 
are here of no avail, and so a short exposure is 
almost always absolutely necessary. 

This necessitates a larger stop and, conse- 
quently, less depth of field. Leaves in the back- 
ground must, obviously, be out of focus, but it is 


154 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


important that there should be nothing between 
the nest and the lens that is not sharply defined. 
In fact, the less of anything there is in front of the 
nest the better will be the picture. 

Nests at the extreme ends of or in the very top- 
most branches, or in trees that cannot be climbed, 
may often be successfully photographed from some 
adjacent tree by means of the telephoto lens. In 
these instances the camera should be placed as 
near the trunk of the tree as practicable, so as to 
obviate as much as is possible any vibration. 

It is never well, when climbing to a nest, to at- 
tempt to carry your camera with you. Leave it 
on the ground attached to the end of a ball of 
twine which you can carry in your pocket and 
pay out as you climb. When you have reached 
the desired spot in the tree, the apparatus can be 
easily hauled up to you. If you attempt to carry 
it up, you not only run the risk of dropping it, 
but of its causing you to fall, yourself, by getting 
in your way. 

As a last resort, when all other attempts at pho- 
tographing the nest fail and if it is one that you 
particularly desire, which cannot easily be found 
again, then you must remove it; but only do 
this when it is impossible to obtain the photo- 
graph by any other means. When it is found to 
be absolutely necessary, then remove the branch 
and all, just as it is, cutting it off carefully so as 


Photographing Birds’ Nests 155 


to disturb the nest as little as is possible. Carry it 
to some spot where its original surroundings can 
be reproduced with, at least, an approach to faith- 
fulness and try to make yourself think that the 
negative you have thus obtained is a sufficient 
recompense for robbing the birds of their home; 
for, no matter how you may tie the branch back 
in its original place or 
return the nest to its 
natural site, or near it, 
they will never, except 
in very rare instances, 
return to it. 

The nests of wood- 
peckers, wrens, and all 
the other birds that 
breed in excavations 
in the limbs or trunks 
of trees must be treated 
ina) muely different 
manner from those of 
any other bird. Here, in many instances, it will 
be found necessary to remove the limb, as no 
amount of ingenuity will devise a scheme for 
photographing them zz szfw when, as frequently 
is the case, they are on the under side of a limb 
that is forty or fifty feet from the ground and 
projecting from a dead tree at an angle of forty- 
five degrees, with no other limb below it. More- 


Bluebird’s Nest and Eggs. 


156 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


over, to remove the limb, in these cases, does 
not in any way impair the naturalness of the 
nest’s surroundings, as the only surroundings it 
has are the limb in which it is built. The birds 
will desert, of course, but they would anyway, as 
the hole must be cut open to show the contents 
and there are only one or two species of birds 
that will return to their nests after this has been 
done. It is unfortunate for the birds, but there 
is no other method of obtaining pictures of their 
nests. 

In cutting open the nests to show the inner 
construction and the eggs, the wall of bark and 
rotten wood may either be cut away from the en- 
trance hole to the eggs or else, after ascertaining 
by the aid of a small twig the exact depth of the 
hole, a small, square piece may be cut out, making 
an entrance at the bottom of the hole and leaving 
the rest of the wall intact. This can best be done 
with a small keyhole saw. By this latter method 
one can show both the entrance hole and the eggs 
and nest complete, and it is by far the better 
method of the two. It is well, however, to remove 
the eggs first by tipping up the limb and allowing 
them to roll down to the entrance hole; otherwise 
they will be very liable to be broken by the saw. 

I began by explaining the ways of working on 
the nests of those birds that build on the ground. 
Now I will go back to those that make their 


Photographing Birds’ Nests ised 


homes underneath the ground, —the kingfishers, 
bank swallows, burrowing owls, etc. Here, of 
course, to show the nest and eggs, the hole must 
be excavated, but first a photograph of the en- 
trance hole should be made. 

The excavating must be done with great care, 
that the loosened earth and stones may not choke 


Entrance Holes to Bank Swallows’ Nests. 


the hole or roll down and break the eggs. The 
excavation must not be carried beyond that point 
which will show the nest and eggs to the best 
advantage. 

In photographing the nests of any of the “ cave- 
dwellers” that make their abodes either in holes 
in trees or in the ground, the mirror will come 


158 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


into play to reflect light into the hole and give 
perfect illumination to the contents. Care must 
be observed not to make the illumination too 
intense, or otherwise the effect of a cavity will 
be lost. 

To those who are ambitious enough to wish to 
use their cameras on the cliff breeders I am very 
much afraid 
Ican give no 
directions, as 
I will freely 
confess. to 
never having 
done any of 
it; and my 
desire to dan- 
gle at the end 
of a rope over 
a hundred 
feet or more 
of empty space is, I fear, not great enough ever to 
lead me to attempt it. The Kearton brothers of 
England have, however, done much of it and, 
through their utter fearlessness, have accom- 
plished some wonderful results. Their methods 
are all fully described in their admirable book, 
“Wild Life at Home,” and should any one desire 
to emulate them, I should advise him to obtain 
this book. 


Nest of Bank Swallow. 


Bank cut away to show eggs. 


Photographing Birds’ Nests 159 


I sincerely trust that every one who enters this 
field of work will do so with a thorough regard 
for, and an appreciation of, the rights of the birds. 
Let the collecting of the photographs take the 
place of the collecting of the eggs which is done 
so indiscriminately nowadays, and in collecting 
these photographs let everybody give the owners 
of the nests as little cause for complaint as he 
can. The more nests you find, photograph, and 
leave intact, the more broods of young you will 
have to work upon a little later and, conse- 
quently, the greater number of photographs you 
will be enabled to obtain. So your care to dis- 
turb the nest as little as possible will work 
not only for the bird’s good, but to your own 
advantage. 


(VBUME III 26 
PHOTOGRAPHING BIRDS AND THEIR YOUNG 


Turs is, to me, the most interesting branch of 
nature work, and yet it is the one that is at- 
tended with, perhaps, the greatest amount of diffi- 
culty. Yet these very difficulties that must be 
overcome should, to an able-bodied man, add to 
the interest and enhance the value of the photo- 
graphs, for it is human nature to care more for 
those things which are obtained through hard 
work and persistent effort than for the ones that 
come to us easily. 

Possibly it is. because I have taken a great 
interest in the feathered inhabitants of the woods 
and fields, since I was old enough to follow and 
study them, that I find the photographing of 
them so intensely enjoyable. Certain it is that it 
was my love of the birds and the wish to become 
more intimately acquainted with them and their 
home life that caused me to take up the camera; 
and, although I have often been discouraged at 
the results, still I have never been sorry that I 
turned my attention and energy to the photo- 
graphing of the wild things. 


160 


Photographing Birds and their Young 161 


To one who has any love of nature and her 
children one of the greatest pleasures to be de- 
rived from the use of a camera is this very insight 


Wild Turkey Hen. 


and intimate knowledge that it enables us to 
obtain of the home life of the wild creatures. 
Through this new sport as by no other means 
can we become thoroughly acquainted with the 


M 


162 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


inhabitants of our woods and fields and really 
know them at their best; and, in thus learning to 
know them, our affection for them and love of 
nature in general is bound to increase. 

As a recorder of facts concerning the home 
life of the birds there is nothing that can equal 
the camera, for it rarely lies; whereas the brush 
or pencil almost invariably does in some detail 
and often in larger and more important points. 
Then, too, photographs of any of the birds are 
invaluable from a scientific standpoint. They 
show accurately and beyond dispute points which, 
heretofore, the artist has been forced to guess 
at, —such as the manner in which they feed 
their young; the various attitudes which they 
assume when perching; and even, with some 
birds, the manner of their flight. 

In photographing birds the breeding season is 
by far the best time, for, at this season of the 
year, the birds are in their best and fullest plu- 
mage and many of them have donned, for this 
especial season, extra finery that they do not 
wear at any other time of the year, —as, for in- 
stance, many of the herons; and, therefore, pic- 
tures can be obtained of them at this time that 
cannot be duplicated, at least for another twelve 
months. Moreover each pair of birds are re- 
stricted to a comparatively limited range sur- 
rounding their nest, and one is always certain of 


Photographing Birds and their Young 163 


finding one or both of them at home when he 
calls. The pictures obtained at this time are of 
the utmost value and interest, and should, where 


possible, be taken 
in series, from the 
building of the 
nest up to the time 
when the young 
leave it to shift for 
themselves; show- 
ing the nest and 
eggs, the old birds 
incubating, the 
young when first 
hatched, the man- 
ner in which they 
are fed, the old 
birds brooding 
them, and, finally, 
as they appear 
after having left 
the nest and just 
prior to flight. If 


we make intimate 


Red-eyed Vireo at Nest feeding Young. 


friends of such a family, we will find them by far 
more interesting than any mere human being 
could possibly be, and, by closely studying their 
ways, we can learn from them many a lesson. 
At this time of the year, too, birds are more 


164 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


tractable than at any other season. This is 
probably due to the fact that the fear for their 
own safety is overshadowed by their desire to 
protect their home and young to the best of their 
ability. Certain it is that we can do with them 
at this period what would be entirely out of the 
question at any other time. 

The fear of mankind is inherent in all birds, 
and, in fact, all wild animals, but by careful 
management and gentle treatment this fear can, 
temporarily and often to a large extent, be al- 
layed; although, owing to the fact that it has been 
inborn through so many generations, we can 
never hope to entirely eradicate it. In the breed- 
ing time, however, as at no other, can we come 
the nearest to doing this, even, in some cases, to 
such a degree as might, to the inexperienced, 
seem almost incredible. This is entirely de- 
pendent upon the individuality of the bird, for 
birds, as well as human beings, have individuality 
and many individuals of the same species vary 
remarkably in their temperament. 

Many times I have found it impossible to con- 
vince a pair of these feathered friends of ours that 
I meant neither them nor their home any harm, 
although I have striven, not only for hours, but 
actually for days, to prove this to them. On the 
other hand I have so far won the confidence of 
another pair, possibly of the same species, that 


Photographing Birds and their Young 165 


they have not only come to their nest and young 
while I was in close proximity, but have actually 
perched upon my hand in order to feed their 
offspring. This I have done repeatedly and 
with different species, some of which have the 
reputation of being among the shyest of all the 
members of our avifauna. 

There is no describing the delightful sensation 
which comes 
over one 
when one of 
these diminu- 
tive creatures 
places such 
confidence in 
our friend- 
ship as to ac- 
tually alight 
upon the 
hand that 
could crush it into a shapeless mass in an instant. 
I do not think there is a person living so low and 
mean that he could violate such a trust. 

I have found birds, at times, so fearless that 
they were almost a nuisance. I remember once 
that I wished to obtain a photograph of a nest 
full of young field sparrows. While I was focus- 
sing, the mother bird flew up and quietly settled 
upon the nest, seemingly without so much as 


Field Sparrow on Nest. 


166 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


noticing me or the camera. Of course I did not 
let such an opportunity pass to obtain pictures of 
the old bird, but I also wanted some of the 
young. Do what I would, however, she would 
not remain off the nest long enough for me to 
focus properly and make an exposure, until I 
finally was forced to take her in my hand and 
hold her while I was doing this. Even then she 
returned to her young the instant that I released 
her. At another time I found it necessary to 
forcibly remove a female bluebird from her nest 
before I could obtain the picture which I wanted 
of the eggs that it contained. 

It is not always the case that the female is the 
most fearless, although Iam bound to admit that 
this is more often so. I have had instances, 
however, as in the case of a male chestnut-sided 
warbler, which I once photographed at its nest, 
where he went repeatedly, and within a short 
time of the setting up of the camera, with 
food for the young, while the female refused to 
approach within several feet of it. She would 
bring food and hop among the bushes, in close 
proximity to the nest, uttering distressed cries, 
but, while the male did his duty, she could not 
overcome her fear of the camera sufficiently to 
allow her to come within three or four feet of it 
and her young ones. 

Some species of birds I have found invariably 


Photographing Birds and their Young 167 


unaffected by all my blandishments and I have 
never been able to obtain any pictures of them. 
Among these are the yellow-breasted chat and 
the blackbird, both of which I have tried to 
photograph time and again, and have spent long, 
discouraging hours in the vain hope of obtaining 
the pictures which I desired of them. Once a 
chat came to her nest of young upon which my 
camera was focussed, but only to touch it and 
immediately leave; and, although I pressed the 
bulb, I was not quick enough, and the resulting 
picture showed no sign of the old bird. 

However, these are the disappointments to 
which we will find that we must continually sub- 
mit, and we must have the patience to bear them 
without becoming discouraged. Often have I 
spent an entire day in the endeavor to photo- 
graph some particularly intractable bird, with 
absolutely no success, and have been forced to 
return home in the evening with no results to 
show, but determined to photograph that same 
bird at some future time if such a thing were 
possible. Of course young birds, before they are 
able to fly, are much more easily photographed 
than are the old ones, for they cannot escape the 
evil eye of the lens by flight. So these are the 
ones upon which the would-be bird photographer 
should first experiment. He will find that he has 
his work cut out for him, however, for, although 


168 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


they cannot easily escape him, they compensate 
for this, to the best of their ability, and show 
their disapproval of the proceedings of the photog- 
rapher, by being as unresponsive and_tantaliz- 
ing as it is possible for any animate thing to be. 
Often the patience of a Job is required to pose 
them, and I have sometimes spent hours in work- 
ing over the 
young alone 
before an ex- 
posure was 
made: eat 
such times I 
have arrived 
at the conclu- 
sion that their 
chief end and 
aim in life was 
to defeat my 
object. 

That which they most delight in doing is to 
fall off the twig or branch upon which one is 
trying to pose them as fast as he can place them 
there. This seems to be through no inability to 
stand there, for if they do not actually fall off, 
and in doing so drag a companion or two with 
them, they will deliberately hop off, and their 
favorite place to perch is the camera itself if they 
have the strength necessary to flutter to it. Any 


Chipping Sparrow feeding Young. 


Photographing Birds and their Young 169 


place seems to offer greater attractions to them 
than that identical twig upon which you wish to 
place them. ‘They will jump from it repeatedly, 
as fast as you can place them there, and then look 
at you in a self-satisfied manner, as much as to 
say, “I won't stay 
there and what are 
you going to do 
about ite Amd 
the only thing to 
be done is to keep 
your patience as 
well as you may 
until you obtain 
their final consent 
to stay where you 
put them, which 
will only be after 
they have grown 
tired of objecting. 
Evens then the 
excitement occa- 
sioned by the ap- 
proach of the parent bird with food is usually 
enough to cause one or two to fall to earth. 
A young bird, however, is interesting from the 
time he leaves the shell, and is a featherless mite 
all neck and head, until he is fully fledged and 
ready to launch himself forth upon the world. 


Young Flickers. 


170 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


When the young are still in the nest they are 
easily photographed, and a series showing the dif- 
ferent stages of their growth is very interesting. 
In doing this it is sometimes necessary to admit 
the sunlight to the nest, but the foliage should be 


pressed and tied back in such a manner that it | 


can be readily returned to its former position, 
and the direct rays of 
the sun allowed to 
remain on the nest as 
short a time as pos- 
sible; for, with very 
young birds especially, 
a short exposure to the 
sun is sufficient to kill 
them. 

Now is the time, 
too, to obtain pictures 
of the old bird feed- 
ing and brooding her 
young and attending to the other duties at the 
nest. It is best not to attempt to do this until 
the young are at least half grown and have 
strength to enable them to bear a considerable 
exposure to the sun’s rays, for it is necessary to 
have as strong a light upon them as possible, as 
on account of the extreme shortness of the ex- 
posure that we must give it is impossible to 
obtain a picture in the shade. 


Screech Owl Asleep by Nest Hole. 


Photographing Birds and their Young 171 


In this work, when possible, I like to get the 
birds so accustomed to my presence, by constant 
association with them, that they will attend to 
their duties while I am close to the nest, for, 
when near by, one can study them to better ad- 
vantage and can also tell when they are in a posi- 
tion best suited to a picture. 

Of course this is often out of the question, 
although the Kearton brothers of England have 
devised a blind in the shape of an artificial tree 
trunk, which is large enough to conceal both the 
camera and the operator. This is made of a 
framework of bamboo, or other light material, 
upon which is stretched cloth painted to resemble 
a tree trunk and covered over with lichens, pieces 
of moss, bark, etc., to make it look more natural. 
This can be set up near the nest, with the camera 
in position inside, and the operator take up his 
stand in it also. A hole is made in the side 
toward the nest through which to thrust the lens, 
and another one to allow the operator to watch 
his bird. Pictures of many of the more timid 
birds, that it would be impossible to obtain 
otherwise, may be made by means of this con- 
trivance. 

I should not advise its use, however, except 
when absolutely necessary, for it is exceedingly 
cumbersome to carry and its most disagreeable 
feature is the fact that it forms a miniature Turk- 


172 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


Bluebird at Nest Hole. 


Photographing Birds and their Young 173 


ish bath for the person concealed inside, and this 
becomes distinctly uninteresting in cases where a 
wait of an hour or two is necessary. 

I find that, with many of the birds, the camera 
needs no hiding so long as the operator is ata 
distance, and so I simply use the long rubber 
tubing and large bulb that will allow me to work 
the shutter from a distance of seventy-five to one 
hundred feet. With some birds, however, it is 
necessary to somewhat conceal the camera, and 
this can be easily accomplished by the use of 
leafy boughs, or a long piece of green cloth that 
will completely drape the camera and tripod, or, 
better still, by a conjunction of the two. 

My course of procedure, after having found a 
nest of half-grown fledglings, is to set up and 
focus my camera upon the nest, leaving enough 
space on either side of the nest in the image to 
admit of the old bird. Then cut away or tie 
back (preferably the latter) all the intervening 
foliage that interferes, in the least, with an unob- 
structed view; insert the plate-holder, attach the 
long tubing, set the shutter, and cover the whole 
with the green cloth (leaving the lens protruding), 
which serves not only to conceal the camera, but 
as a further protection to the plate from the sun’s 
rays. This protection is important, as the plate, 
during the long wait that is often necessary, 
would be liable to fog if left with no other pro- 


174 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


tection than that which the camera itself affords. 
The outside of this cloth can, as I have said, be 
made to conform more closely with its surround- 
ings by pinning or tying to it twigs, leaves, and 
small branches. Care should be taken that noth- 
ing interferes with the free working of the shut- 
ter. After these arrangements are completed 


Young Shrikes at Nest. 
Photographed at a height of twenty feet. 


nothing remains to be done but to retire to the 
end of the tubing and wait in the shade, yourself 
concealed as much as possible, until the old birds 
see fit to return to their nest and young. This 
may be in a very short time, or it may not be for 
several hours; but there are few birds whose 
parental love will not overcome their natural fear 
and take them to their young before those young 
have had the chance to die from neglect, which 


Photographing Birds and their Young 175 


would happen if the old birds should stay away 
too long. 

I do not believe in, nor can I advocate, the 
changing of the nesting site under any but the 
most extraordinary conditions, for it not only 
shows the nest and contents among false sur- 
roundings, but it greatly endangers the life of the 
young. To cut off the limb of a tree containing 
a nest and remove it to some more convenient 
place is, I know, often an easier matter than to 
photograph it zz sztw, especially when that nest 
happens to be some distance from the ground; 
and so this is the method employed by many 
bird photographers to save themselves time and 
trouble. 

In fact, one man openly advocates doing this 
in a book which he has written and in which he 
terms it “control of the nesting site.” When a 
nest is so situated that it is difficult to photo- 
graph it in its original position, he removes it, 
branch and all, to a suitable spot and sets it up 
again outside of a tent placed there for the pur- 
pose of concealing himself and camera. “This 
sudden displacement of the nesting bough,” the 
author remarks, “is of no special importance to 
either young or old, provided certain precautions 
are taken;” and he goes on to say that “with 
some species it is possible to make the necessary 
change without evil consequences when there are 


176 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


eggs in the nest.” With all due respect to the 
author, I must differ with him, for an experience 
of some twenty-five years with the birds has 
taught me that but one or two species will return 
to their nests containing eggs when those nests 
have been removed from their original site, and 
many will desert if they have been in the slightest 
way disturbed. Moreover, even after the young 
are in the nest, it is not always that the old birds 
will return to them after they have been removed 
to a distance, and it must be some one well ac- 
quainted with the habits of the bird who can suc- 
cessfully avail himself of this method; and, even 
then, it must needs be attended with numerous 
casualties. 

That the results justify the means I cannot 
admit, for no matter how carefully the nest is set 
up again the change in the character of its sur- 
roundings is bound to show and produce a more 
or less artificial effect. This is the one thing 
above all others that should be avoided in nature 
photography. 

I cannot help thinking the book of which I 
speak a menace to our songsters; for it will serve 
to teach the uninitiated a method by which they 
will imagine they may easily photograph the 
birds, and it will take many nests full of dead 
young to prove to them their error. In the 
hands of an expert field ornithologist this method 


Photographing Birds and their Young 177 


has some advantages as giving one ample oppor- 
tunity to study the nest lives of the birds at close 
range, but it should emphatically be undertaken 
only by those who are thoroughly competent to 
take advantage of the opportunity and who will 
have due respect for the welfare of the nest’s in- 


Chickadee feeding Young. 
Negative with background stopped out. 


mates. Even then it should only be used when 
all other means fail. 

When the young birds are ready to leave the 
nest they, with the old birds, can be photographed 
with the aid of the long tubing in the manner 
described, either perching on or about the nest or 
posed upon a twig. In focussing upon them we 
must always be careful to leave a sufficient space 

N 


178 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


for the old bird, that its image may be entirely 
upon the plate when the exposure is made. It 
will not do to leave this space at one side only, 
for as surely as 
we do this the 
bird will con- 
clude to alight 
upon the oppo- 
site side, no 
Ma cte Gye Ly eeue 
should be the 
most inconven- 
era, Ya Jesuit 
seems to be 
ees asi naturally obsti- 
Young Blackbirds. nate and will 
invariably try 

to do just the things that we do not wish of it. 
In order to surely secure these young birds as 
they leave the nest we must have some knowledge 
of their habits and must watch them carefully, for 
the period of time that the young remain in the 
nest varies greatly in different species. The 
quails, sandpipers, etc., leave almost as soon as 
they are hatched, and every egg in a grouse’s nest 
may hatch out and the young leave in the course 
of two or three hours. Swallows always remain 
in their nests until they are able to fly, and none 
of the birds that breed high leave their nests until 


Photographing Birds and their Young 179 


they are nearly to this condition and can perch 
with safety in the surrounding branches. The 
ground breeders and those that build in the low 
bushes desert their nests, on the other hand, as 
soon as they can struggle out, and when they are 
once gone it is difficult to find them among the 
long grass and low herbage. 

Now is the time, as I have already said, when 
your patience will be tried to the utmost, but by 
perseverance you will nearly always win. An 
experience which I had with a young and old 
vireo adequately illustrates the troubles which 
you will have. I 
had but one of the 
young ones, all the 
rest had escaped 
me, and it took me 
nearly an hour to 
make that onestand 
where I wished him. 
Finally I had him 
posed to my satis- 
faction and, after 
waiting for nearly 
two hours, had the 
pleasure of seeing 
the old bird approach with some food in her 
mouth. My pleasure was short lived, however, 
for she paused on a twig some little distance 


Young Downy Woodpeckers. 


180 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


from her offspring and commenced a series of 
calls as though telling him to come to her. This, 
I think, is what she really was doing, for, much 
to my disgust, he immediately jumped from the 
perch and fluttered to meet her. I returned 
him to the branch, and after two repetitions of 
this act the old bird concluded to come to him; 
and I finally succeeded in obtaining some very 
good photographs, but it occupied over five hours 
of my time to get them. 

If an old bird is very obdurate and does not 
come to her young inside of a couple of hours, it 
is well to remove the camera for a short time and 
allow her to feedthem. This prevents them from 
becoming too hungry and consequently restless, 
and the old bird will often return more quickly 
after the camera has been replaced. 

Always, in handling young birds, use the great- 
est care, for they are easily injured by being held 
too tightly. 

The full-fledged young by themselves make in- 
teresting pictures, and should we capture them 
when they have just left the nest they can be taken 
home and reared easily. Then we can photo- 
graph them at will, up to the time when they are full 
grown, after which we can let them go back to their 
native wilds if we have no further use for them. 

Some photographers use a small cage made of 
mosquito netting and tapering to a funnel, the neck 


Photographing Birds and their Young 181 


of which is fastened about the barrel of the lens. 
This device admits of being moved into any posi- 
tion and lighting required, and may be useful in 
some cases. I have never tried it, and therefore 
cannot speak knowingly about it. It would seem 
to me, however, that it 
would be of but little |* 
use with anything but 
young birds that had 
just learned to fly. 
For photographing the 
old birds in captivity I 
would much rather 
follow the plan of one 
photographer who has 
a studio devoted en- 
tirely to this purpose, 
in which he has dif- 
ferent perches in the 
shape of various tree trunks, branches, etc., and 
where he can arrange any accessories he may 
think necessary. In this place he liberates his 
birds, allowing them the run of the whole room, 
and does not attempt to do any work with them 
until they are sufficiently tamed to allow of his 
close approach. By this method he has done 
some fine work from a merely anatomical stand- 
point, but, as far as pictures are concerned, I can- 
not think them a success. 


Young Wood Thrush. 


182 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


I have mentioned these two methods of photo- 
graphing the birds simply because they are 
methods that are used by some of the bird pho- 
tographers, not because I advocate their use. I 
have never taken a picture of a bird in captivity, 
except of some of the larger water-birds in the 
Zoos, and I cannot think that as good results are 
thus obtained as by photographing them in their 
native haunts. 

Of course, to photograph an old wild bird pre- 
sents great difficulties, but I have shown how it can 
be done with their young, and there are many ways 
in which single pictures of them can be obtained. 
In going to and from her young when feeding 
them, a bird usually has some resting point upon 
which she perches more often than elsewhere. 
By watching her while she is making three or four 
trips we can learn where this point is, and by 
focussing upon it we are often enabled to obtain 
characteristic and satisfactory pictures of the old 
bird alone. 

Mr. F. M. Chapman, who has done some very 
clever bird photography, says he has had some ex- 
cellent opportunities to photograph by decoying 
the birds by means of a mounted screech owl. 
As I have never tried this I cannot speak from 
experience and will quote what he says: “ My 
plan is to select some spot where birds are numer- 
ous, preferably near the home of a catbird, place 


Photographing Birds and their Young 183 


the owl in a conspicuous position, and erect near 
it a ‘scolding perch,’ from which the protesting 
bird may conveniently vituperate the poor, unof- 
fending bunch of feathers with its staring eyes. 
The camera is then focussed on the scolding 
perch and the photographer retires into the under- 
brush, and, bulb in hand, waits for some bird to 
take the desired stand. A catbird’s domain is 
chosen for the reason that this species is the 
alarmist of whatever neighborhood it may inhabit, 
and once its attention has been attracted to the 
owl by ‘squeaking’ or uttering the alarm notes 
of other birds, the photographer may subside and 
allow the catbird to do the rest. 

“ The bird’s rage is remarkable, its fear painful. 
Should the owl be near to the catbird’s nest it 
will utter notes ina tone of voice I have never 
heard it use on other occasions. It loses all fear 
of the camera, and from the scolding perch 
screams at the owl with a vehemence which 
threatens to crack its throat. One is glad to re- 
move the offending cause. 

“Other birds in the vicinity are of course at- 
tracted, and hasten to learn the meaning of the 
uproar. Often a bit of undergrowth of which 
the catbird was apparently the only feathered ten- 
ant will be found to possess a large bird popula- 
tion. It is interesting to observe the difference 
in the actions of various birds as they learn the 


184 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


reason of the disturbance. On the whole, each 
species displays its characteristic disposition in a 
somewhat accentuated manner. The blue-winged 
warblers flit to and fro for a moment and then 
are gone; the chestnut-sided warbler is quite 
anxious; the Maryland yellowthroat somewhat 
annoyed; the ovenbird decidedly concerned; the 
towhee bustles about, but seems to pay no es- 
pecial attention to the owl; the wood thrush 
utters its sharp ‘pit-pit,’ but is content to let well 
enough alone if its own nest is not threatened ; 
and the yellow-throated, red-eyed and _ white- 
eyed vireos, particularly the latter, add their com- 
plaining notes to the chorus of protests. Not one, 
however, approaches the catbird in the force of 
its remarks, nor does the bird cease its outcry so 
long as the owl is visible.” 

With the water-birds, the blinds, decoys, sneak- 
boxes, and batteries of the sportsman can be used 
to advantage, and, needless to say, here it is neces- 
sary to use the reflex with as long focus a lens as 
possible. In fact, a long focus lens is always pref- 
erable. When photographing over water, where 
the light is intensified by reflection, the telephoto 
can be used for instantaneous exposures ranging 
from % to 5 of a second and very excellent re- 
sults thus obtained. 

In the winter time birds may readily be brought 
within range of the camera by baiting them, for 


Photographing Birds and their Young 185 


they are then sometimes short of food and con- 
tinually on the lookout for it. A good plan is 
to bait a spot repeatedly for several days before 
attempting to do any photographing. Then set 
up your camera, focussed upon some of the bait, 
and, retiring to a distance, wait until the birds 


American Crow. 


come to that particular spot, making the exposure 
by means of the long tubing. If this is done near 
a building, you can do your waiting indoors in 
greater comfort. At this season of the year, also, 
some birds, as the chickadee, can be enticed to 
one’s very hand by the use of bait. In fact, the 
winter is a very good time for photographing 
such birds as remain with us during that season, 


186 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


for they then seem to be more fearless and many 
of them congregate in flocks. A flock of cedar- 
waxwings, sitting upon some bare tree in the 
peculiar attitude which they assume, could be 
easily photographed with the telephoto lens. 

At any time in releasing your shutter from a 
distance a piece of twine can be substituted for 
the tubing, but it is not so good, for on several 
occasions I have had birds alight on the tubing, 
and once, when photographing a catbird at her 
nest, the old bird actually fought with it, catching 
it in her bill and claws and giving it vicious tugs. 
Had I been using the twine, this would have 
released the shutter, and a number of plates would 
have been needlessly wasted. 

Old birds sitting upon their eggs or brooding 
their young can be photographed successfully, even 
in the shade, by means of the telephoto lens at a 
distance of twenty-five or fifty feet or even more, 
for they sit perfectly motionless, allowing of sufh- 
cient time for any length of exposure. With this, 
as well as with all work upon birds, absolute 
quietness and slowness of motion are requisite. 
A bird will often remain calmly upon her nest and 
allow one to approach to within a few feet of her 
if the approach is made slowly and gently, but 
any sudden movement or sharp noise, such as 
the snapping of a twig, will cause her to leave 
instantly. 


Photographing Birds and their Young 187 


There has been done some little work in photo- 
graphing adult birds by means of a flash-light. 
This has been accomplished by going to the 
place where they are known to roost and using a 
fixed focus camera. I have never tried it myself, 
nor do I think 
it a satisfactory 
method. 

The photog- 
raphy of flying 
or soaring birds 
is extremely dif- 
ficult, necessi- 
tating, as it 
does, not only 
a very rapid 
exposure, but 
extreme quick- 
ness of eye and fee: 
hand. Need- Young Green Herons. 
less to say, the 
only camera that can be used to advantage in 

this work is the reflex. It was not until this type 
of camera was placed on the market that we had 
any pictures of birds in flight, but already much 
excellent work has been done in that direction. 
The best places for making these photographs are 
in localities where the birds colonize. A gull or 
heron rookery offers many opportunities, but we 


188 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


must be quick to catch their image as they rise 
or soar over our heads, and the exposure must be 
made the instant that image is caught. 

But quickness is the keynote of success in all 
work with birds. We must be ready to take 
advantage of every opportunity that is offered 
and never let a chance to get a photograph 
escape us. 

The great water-bird rookeries of Florida are 
the ideal places for bird work. Unfortunately 
many of these have been nearly wiped out by the 
feather hunters, but there are still some left, 
although they are difficult to get at. Since the 
law causing the traffic in these feathers to be a 
penal offence has gone into effect, these birds 
have been steadily on the increase, and I look for 
those rookeries to be, in time,as numerous and as 
large as they once were. 

In 1895 I visited one comprised of at least five 
thousand pairs of breeding birds. This is prob- 
ably the largest rookery now in Florida and has 
been undisturbed, owing to the extreme difficulty 
with which it is approached. Unfortunately for 
me, at the time I did not have a camera with me, 
but I could not help seeing the photographic pos- 
sibilities of the place. Some day I hope to return 
to it with all the proper outfit, and when I do 
I shall not be satisfied until I have photographed 
it thoroughly; and I therefore intend to keep its 


Photographing Birds and their Young 189 


whereabouts a secret, for it is known to but few 
people. 

The great Cuthbert rookery, which I have also 
visited, and which is situated in the almost unap- 
proachable depths of the cypress swamp that sur- 
rounds the Everglades, is, probably, the largest 
of the better known rookeries; but it does not 
approach, either in the number of the individuals 
or of the species of birds which it contains, the 
one of which I speak. 


Clabaie Inga <I 


PHOTOGRAPHING INSECTS 


Tue first thought that is apt to come into 
one’s mind when the photography of insects is 
mentioned is the smallness of the subjects as a 
general rule. To be sure, there are a number of 
moths and butterflies that are as large as good- 
sized birds, but the great majority of the insect 
life is small, even minute. 

This is, of course, one of the main obstacles in 
the path of the insect photographer, as it necessi- 
tates close work; and yet this branch, when com- 
pared to the photographing of birds or animals, is 
easy. It needs but a little patience and at least a 
working knowledge of your subjects. 

Insect life, no matter how small, can be photo- 
graphed successfully. Even the very minute 
forms, that are invisible to the naked eye, can, 
by the aid of the micro-photographic camera, be 
enlarged to any desired size on the plate. I do 
not consider it necessary, however, to describe 
this camera or enter into the details of the man- 
ner in which it is worked, as this does not 
properly come under the head of nature photog- 


190 


Photographing Insects 191 


raphy, and those photographs are of interest only 
to the scientist who is studying the lower forms 
of animal and insect life. I shall confine myself, 
therefore, solely to the methods used in photo- 
graphing those insects which we commonly know 
and see. 

One need not suppose that this is a limited field 
of action. There is a plentiful amount of work 
for the most ambitious photographer, and he will 
never be at a loss to know what to do next, even 
though he should confine himself entirely to the 
moths and butterflies. 

Hunting butterflies is by no means a novel 
sport, and the gunner who has followed larger 
game with shot-gun or rifle need not imagine that 
there is no excitement in the chase. To be sure, 
the quarry sought is small and can offer no resist- 
ance to its capture but flight; but to follow a 
coveted specimen through brambles and thickets, 
across fields and meadows, until it descends to 
earth and alights upon some flower or leaf; to 
creep stealthily forward until within striking dis- 
tance, perhaps only to see it, by a quick dart, 
escape the sweep of the net, and sail away again 
over the trees; to follow once more, heeding not 
where it leads, until it is safely bagged, requires 
quickness of eye and hand and a considerable 
amount of ingenuity, nor is it without its full 
quota of excitement. 


192 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


The desire to collect something seems to be a 
natural desire with every healthy American boy. 
Butterflies are among the collectable objects that 
are most frequently sought, and there is scarcely 
a town in the length and breadth of the United 
States that does not contain one of these embryo 


Spider repairing Web. 


entomologists who is the proud possessor of a 
cabinet of illy mounted butterflies which he is 
wont to display on every possible occasion. 
Instead of chasing these dainty denizens of the 
air, that aid so materially in completing the 
beauty of a midsummer day, with the sole inten- 
tion of cutting shorter their already too short 
lives and pinning their dried bodies in a musty 


Photographing Insects 193 


cabinet along with those of others of their fellows 
who have met a similar fate, how much better 
would it be were each one of these budding 
naturalists (who, by the way, seldom blossom) 
supplied with a camera with which to chase his 
“game,” less dangerous 
to the insect and more 
instructive to the boy! 

But it is not only the 
boys whom I should 
advise to follow the 
insects with a camera; 
for it is a chase prolific 
with possibilities, and 
many of its problems 
and obstacles can be 
successfully coped with 
only by a man. It is 
a most fascinating field 
for camera work and 
one in which there is 
much to be done, for 
there are, as yet, but 
few serious workers in it and there is ample room 
for all those who wish to enter. 

There are a diversity of difficulties to be over- 
come, but to the active man these difficulties are, 
or should be, nothing ; and it is strange to me that, 


in a field which is so full of chances to obtain such 
(e) 


Lana Moth hanging from Cocoon. 


194 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


intensely interesting and valuable material, there 
should be so few workers. While our books on 
animal and bird life are now profusely illustrated 
with excellent photographs of that life, those on 
insects still continue to use the old-style drawings, 
or, at the best, photographs from dead specimens. 
We seldom see anything but an occasional pho- 
tograph of a 
moth or but- 
terfly, and yet 
there is no rea- 
son why the 
photographs of 
insect, ~ “ite 
should not be 
just as plenti- 
ful and as good 
as are those in any other branch of natural 
history. 

Of course, to do the best work possible in this 
branch, one should be something of an entomolo- 
gist; but this knowledge will come, without any 
tedious studying, after one has taken up the pur- 
suit of the insects with a camera. It is well to 
know, however, something of the habits of your 
subjects before you begin, else you will be at a 
loss where and when to look for them. This 
knowing where to look is rather necessary if one 
would be entirely successful in his quest of them, 


Mourning-cloak Butterfly. 


Photographing Insects 195 


for all the insects have their chosen haunts, and, 
more or less consistently, remain in them. One 
cannot expect, for instance, to find a mourning- 
cloak butterfly in low, swampy places, or one of 
the Fritillaries in the high, dry woods. 

Insects can be found any and every where, how- 
ever, and may be photographed the year round. 
From early April until late October, and even 
into November, they are abroad in greater or less 
numbers, and during the winter months there is 
always the pupal stage of which to make photo- 
graphs. . 

It is seldom if ever necessary to use a camera 
larger than a four by five, for with this size it is 
possible to obtain life-size pictures of nearly all 
our native insects, provided we have a long-focus 
lens and a sufficient length of bellows extension. 
The focal length of the lens should not be less 
than nine or ten inches, and the bellows of the 
camera should be capable of an extension of at 
least twenty inches. 

A great deal of the photography of insects can 
be done indoors, and, when possible, this is the 
best place in which to do it. 

If one is taking up this pursuit seriously, he 
should have a place where he can rear insects, 
especially the Lepidoptera, from the larve, so 
that he may be enabled to photograph them in 
all their stages of growth and metamorphosis. 


196 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


This is not a difficult thing to do, but it requires 
almost constant care and one must give up prac- 
tically his entire time to it if he would carry it 
through successfully. The resulting pictures are 
well worth the trouble and are of the utmost 
interest from a naturalist’s point of view. 

The larve, or caterpillars, should be captured, 


Larva of Walnut Moth. 


of course, as young as possible, or, where practi- 
cable, hatched from the egg. They should be 
photographed several times during this stage, 
showing their various conditions of growth, and 
always on their food plant. The cocoons and 
pupa can be studied and photographed at one’s 
leisure during the winter months, but from the 
first of May these must be watched constantly for 
the first sign of the coming forth of their inmates, 


Photographing Insects 197 


or otherwise they may escape us entirely. Many 
of the Lepidoptera, especially the moths, give no 
intimation of their intended advent, but when we 
are lucky enough to obtain a series of photo- 
graphs of one emerging from his cocoon it is 
intensely interesting. 

The common milkweed butterfly makes an ex- 
cellent subject for this work, for, by watching the 
chrysalid, we can tell almost to the minute when 
the butterfly will emerge. Also, in this connec- 
tion, it is well to make pictures showing the va- 
rious changes in the evolution from the larval to 
the pupal stage. 

The butterfly or moth newly emerged from his 
pupal case is in a much crumpled and dampened 
condition, but its wings gradually grow and unfold, 
and photographs should be made during this pro- 
cess. After the wings are entirely spread there 
is a period, generally extending over about two or 
three hours, during which the insect is absolutely 
quiescent waiting for its wings to dry and harden 
sufficiently to bear its weight. It can, during this 
period, if handled carefully, be placed on any 
flower-head or other resting-place, and in any 
position desired, and the most satisfactory results 
in work on butterflies are thus obtained. 

The photographing should be done close to a 
window. One facing the north is preferable, as 
the light is much more steady from that direction 


i98 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


Newly Emerged Cecropia Moth. 


Photographing Insects 199 


than from any other. The subject should be 
placed well to one side of the window, so that the 
light may fall upon it as full as possible. The 
light can also be equalized by the use of white 
paper or cardboard reflectors and by the white 
screen which should be used as a background and 
placed about a foot back of the subject. 

The camera should be placed close enough to 
the subject to give at least a three-quarter-size 
picture and, where possible, a life-size one is 
preferable. In focussing, that portion of the sub- 
ject nearest the lens should be made sharp on the 
ground glass and then the rest brought into clear 
detail by stopping down the lens. This will 
necessarily lengthen the time of exposure, but the 
subject, at this time of its life, is perfectly willing 
to remain absolutely still and allow plenty of 
time for focussing and exposing. By this method 
one can obtain better and clearer pictures than 
by any other, for there is no confusion of sur- 
roundings to detract from the main object and 
the resulting picture is clear and sharp cut in its 
details. 

Much can and, necessarily, must be done out 
of doors, however, and it is impossible to obtain 
pictures of the quick changes of a butterfly, moth, 
or other insect from its pupal stage in anything 
but the bright sunlight, as instantaneous exposures 
are then necessary. 


200 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


I have obtained many satisfactory photographs, 
also, of butterflies as they alight naturally on 
flower-heads, in the following manner: Find, in 
some butterfly-frequented spot, a conspicuous 
flower-head, one that 
stands well above its 


av fellows and is, in con- 
BOY, sequence, more likely 
= to be visited by the 
t butterflies than are the 
i en SS others. Now set up 
{i} =. * 3X | the camera and focus 


upon the flower at a 
distance of about one 
“ and a half to two feet 
i . from it. If the flower 
y should be in very 
bright sunlight, and it 
a is best that it should 
a be, and the lens is 
a rapid one, then it 
can be stopped down 
slightly to increase sharpness of detail and depth 
of field. The shutter should then be set to work 
at about ;4, of a second; the plate-holder inserted ; 
the slide drawn; and the camera well covered by 
the focussing cloth to prevent any possible fog- 
ging of the plate. The rest is now simply a mat- 
ter of waiting, with what patience we may have 


Cabbage Butterfly. 


Photographing Insects 201 


at our command, until some butterfly, bee, or 
other insect that we may wish to photograph con- 
descends to choose that particular flower-head 
upon which to alight, when the exposure can be 
made and we have our picture, provided nothing 
has gone wrong. If the long rubber tubing is 
used, we may retire to the shade of some near- 
by tree and wait in greater comfort. This will 
sometimes insure 
quicker _ results, 
too, for a butterfly 
will often pass by 
a flower it might 
otherwise have 
visited, if it sees 
a human being 
standing near it. 
It is sometimes 
well to have a 
piece of white 
cloth or paper 
back of the flower 
to shut out what 
would otherwise 
be a disagreeably 
out-of-focus background; but this should be at 
least two feet back of the flower so as not to show 
in the picture as being what it is, and we should 
choose when possible a flower that will not make 


Black Swallow-tails. 


Male and female. 


202 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


this necessary, for it, too, tends to scare away the 
butterfly. 

Of course, the use of the reflex camera makes 
all this preliminary arrangement unnecessary, and 
we can by its aid obtain many pictures that 
would be impossible with the ordinary outfit. 
Moreover it allows us to work quicker and thus 
make more exposures in a certain length of time, 
thereby giving another example of the advantage 
of using this type of camera. 

I would not advocate the use of the telephoto 
lens in this work, although it may be used to 
advantage occasionally; but an insect 1s so much 
more easily approached than are any other of the 
wild things that I consider the use of this lens in 
this connection unnecessary. 

Always wait, before releasing the shutter, until 
the wings of the butterfly, if it is a butterfly that 
you are photographing, are at rest, for there is no 
shutter made, with the possible exception of the 
focal plane, that will work fast enough to entirely 
stop action in the fluttering of a butterfly’s wings. 
The fast orthochromatic plates should always be 
used, as they reproduce the color values of the 
insect and flower almost to perfection. 

All the apphances of the entomologist will 
come in handy for the insect photographer. It 
will frequently be found necessary to use the net, 
and many interesting subjects can be captured by 


Photographing Insects 203 


beating the long grass and low herbage that 
would otherwise be passed by unnoticed. Occa- 
sionally it may be found advantageous to photo- 
graph dead specimens, and under such conditions 
the vertical 
stand, spoken 
of in Chap- 
ter V, will be 
most conven- 
lente Lean 
never an advo- 
cate of the use 
of dead speci- 
mens, how- 
ever, except in 
such few, ex- 
ceptional cases 
when it is ab- 
solutely neces- 
sary todo soin 
order to illus- 
trate more 
clearly some particular point. The real value in 
all nature work lies in the fact that the products 
represent the subject exactly as it was in life, and 
this can never be so if it is photographed dead. 
Of course the Lepidoptera (the butterflies and 
moths), among which are some of our largest 
insects, prove the most interesting subjects, and 


Moths Asleep in Daytime. 


204 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


midsummer and early autumn are the gala sea- 
sons for these beautiful and dainty creatures. 
The moths, being principally night flyers, are best 
photographed from reared specimens, although 
one may often find them resting, during the day, 
among the thicker foliage. The butterflies may 
be photographed any and every where, how- 
ever, Ones need) mot 
take long, wearisome 
tramps in the hot sun 
to find subjects. Any 
flower-covered field or 
piece of marshland will 
supply him with all the 
material he can con- 
veniently use, and he 
will find that, in such 
a place, two dozen 
plates will be all too 
few for the demands 
made upon them. 

The marshes, where 
grow the thoroughworts, milkweeds, sunflowers, 
and thistles, I have found to be the places most 
prolific with butterfly life, and have spent many 
a pleasant and instructive morning or afternoon 
in such a place. 

The orchards are also good places to work, for 
they are the chosen haunts of the anglewings. 


Moth on Tree Trunk. 


Showing protective coloring. 


Photographing Insects 205 


These delightful little fellows are among the best 
examples of protective coloring in the insect 
world. Their flight is very rapid and jerky, and 
it needs a quick eye to follow them. When at 
rest on the trunk or limb of some apple or other 
tree their wings are folded tightly together, show- 
ing only the under sides, the indefinite coloring and 
marking of which so nearly matches that of the 
bark upon which they are resting that, at the dis- 
tance of a few feet, it is almost impossible to distin- 
guish them from it. In the autumn they feed upon 
the decayed fruit, and I have often seen as many 
as half a dozen on one half-rotten apple. This is 
the best time for the photographer to hunt them. 

Many butterflies are lovers of the woods and 
seldom leave the deeper shaded places. Others 
can only be found at the seashores and still others 
in the higher mountains. In fact subjects can be 
found in any locality. 

During June the butterflies increase in numbers 
very rapidly, and he who follows them with the 
camera will soon discover that he can occupy his 
time in this chase to the exclusion of all else. 
July and August are, however, the months in 
which they are abroad in the utmost profusion. 
Then they are everywhere, and one cannot go 
amiss in looking for them. They float over the 
meadows, swamps, and gardens, along the dusty 
roadsides and cool, green woodland paths in an 


206 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


ever changing, iridescent swarm. All the sunny 
places are alive with them. Gorgeous big fellows 
in deep velvety blacks, yellows, and reds, and 
smaller ones in more delicate blues and white. 
Their wings are of all shapes and outlines and 
covered with an infinite variety of designs and 
markings. They are all constantly on the move, 


Dragon Flies. 


seemingly tireless and seldom still, but they offer 
many opportunities to the picture hunter who is 
quick enough to take advantage of them, and the 
resulting pictures are ofttimes exceedingly beauti- 
ful as well as interesting. 

To me it is enough simply to be abroad and 
a part of such a carnival of light and color, and I 
have no doubt that many will echo that sentiment. 
To those who must needs have an object in view, 
to take them to these beauty spots of the world 


Photographing Insects 207 


when the day is breathless and the sun more than 
warm, the camera offers an incentive. 

And how much better it is to carry a camera 
rather than a collecting net and killing jar; how 
much better to have the indestructible image of 
the butterfly on our sensitive plate than his all too 
destructible body in our cabinet! But if we must 
have the latter, why not take the former first? For, 
if we are a student of entomology, we will find 
that it will be of material aid to us in our studies. 

That entomology cannot be placed in the cate- 
gory of useless pursuits has been sufficiently 
proved by the invaluable assistance, in the way of 
advice, which those who follow the study in a 
scientific manner have been enabled to give to the 
agriculturist. Advice which, when taken, has 
enabled him to successfully cope with the enor- 
mous army of vegetable-destroying insects. 

That the photographic branch of entomology, 
although comparatively a new one, is also of 
immense importance is evidenced by the fact that 
the scientists have taken it up. Each one who 
enters this field has it in his power to be of some 
aid to the rest of mankind. So let us work with 
some serious end in view, not merely with the in- 
tention of passing away the time; and, moreover, 
let us do the best work that lies in our power, and, 
in order to do this, we should never be entirely 
satisfied with our results. 


CHAPTER XII 


PHOTOGRAPHING FISH AND OTHER FORMS OF 
AQUATIC LIFE 


Tuis is the youngest of all the various branches 
of nature photography, and the one in which there 
are the fewest workers. Like many of the other 
branches it has been but a very few years since 
the only photographs of fish that we had were 
those made from mounted specimens, and to say 
merely that these were unsatisfactory would be 
to accord them undue praise. They were worse 
than worthless. 

No one thought at that time that it could be 
possible to photograph the living fish, but some 
one, I have forgotten who, tried to improve on the 
old method by using freshly caught fish impaled 
onanail. The results were no better, however, 
and it was left for Dr. Shufeldt of Washington 
(who, I believe, was the pioneer in this line of 
work) to show the world at large what beautiful 
results could be obtained from the living speci- 
mens in their natural element. 

Fishes, like everything else, must be known to 
be photographed successfully, and so it is well, if 


208 


Photographing Fish 209 


we would do good work along this line, to first 
learn the principal habits of those fish that we 
intend to work with. We shall find that it will 
not only simplify matters, but tend toward better 
results. 

From a scientific standpoint, and here is where 
fish photographs are most useful, it is necessary 
that the subject should show a correct delineation 
with absolutely no distortion and a sharp outline. 
One writer, who has done much good work in 
this line of photography, puts it thus: The 
following four characteristics should be observed 
as being of the most importance: the length of 
head, tail, and fins in proportion to the total length 
of the body; the general contour of the living 
specimen; the number of rays in his fins; the 
lateral line and the number of scales along it. It 
can be seen readily that the only correct view that 
can be taken of a fish in a photograph is a direct 
side view. 

From the nature of this work it requires some 
special apparatus, and foremost among this is an 
aquarium. ‘This will have to be made to order, 
for none of the aquariums that are sold by dealers 
in such things will answer the purpose. Any 
carpenter can make one from our own specifica- 
tions; or, if we are at all handy with tools, we 
can do so for ourselves and, probably, with greater 
satisfaction. It should be made of white pine, 

P 


210 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


clear of knot holes, for the bottom, sides, and back, 
and with a piece of absolutely the best quality of 
white plate-glass in the front. That this latter 
should be perfectly clear and free from bubbles is 
essential, for upon the fact of its absolute trans- 
parency depends much of the success of the 
pictures. The size of the tank depends entirely 
upon the size of the fish we intend to photograph ; 
and it is a good idea, although not necessary, to 
have two made, one for small and one for large 
fishes. If only one is used, then it must be large 
enough to receive the largest fishes ; and, naturally, 
when we put those of a small size into it, it will 
be difficult to prevent them from constantly swim- 
ming out of the field of focus. 

The wood should be thoroughly shellacked and 
painted white on the inside (with enamel paint) 
before being put together. 

If long brass screws are used in the construction 
of the tank, it will admit of its being taken apart 
and packed in a small space for transportation ; 
but if this is done, the parts that come into con- 
tact should be made water-tight by strips of rubber 
inserted between them. When a fish is first 
placed in a tank, almost his first act is to retire to 
the very back of his prison; and as we need him as 
near the front with as little water intervening be- 
tween him and the lens as is possible, it is obvious 
that we must have some means of forcing him to 


Photographing Fish 211 


go and stay where we wish him. This can be 
accomplished by means of a glass partition which 
can be slipped into grooves on the side boards. 
There should be several pairs of these grooves at 
different distances from the front glass, so that we 
can make the compartment in which we wish to 
confine our subject of any size that we please. 

The plate-glass in the front should be fastened 
by means of hardwood battens at the sides and 
bottom, between which and the glass there should 
also be inserted the strips of rubber so that, when 
they are screwed down tight, there will be no 
leakage. 

This tank can be placed on any support and 
the ordinary tripod used with the camera, but it 
is convenient to have a support that will hold 
both tank and camera, which has the advantage 
of keeping them both upon the same plane. 
This may be simply a pair of wooden horses 
with a wide board laid across. This, of course, 
must be long enough to allow a sufficient dis- 
tance between the lens and the tank, and will 
admit of varying the distance between the two 
easily and at will. If it is found necessary to 
raise the camera any, this can be done by means 
of an extra piece of board or two placed under- 
neath it; and any simple device for clamping the 
camera to the board will answer to hold it steady, 
though, if care is used, this is not necessary. 


212 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


A lens of great focal length has no particular 
value in this work, as very little depth of field 
is necessary. I should advise the use of one of 
about nine or ten inches for a six and a half 
by eight and a half plate. Of course the faster 


Common Crab. 


it is the better, for fish will seldom stay absolutely 
quiet for a sufficient length of time to allow of 
anything but an instantaneous exposure. 
Always use the orthochromatic plates, for 
many of the fish are brightly colored; and these 
plates, as has been before stated, are the only 
ones that reproduce anywhere near the true 


Photographing Fish 213 


color values. They are somewhat slower than 
the ordinary fast plate, and this must be taken 
into consideration, but it is entirely compensated 
by the superior quality of the negative which we 
are enabled to obtain with them. 

When the fish to be photographed will remain 
quietly in one position for a long enough time 
to allow us to do so, the very best results can 
be obtained by the use of the slow isochromatic 
plate in conjunction with the ray filter; but such 
fishes are few and far between, and we must not 
expect to find them often. 

One of the greatest obstacles with which one 
has to contend in this work is the difficulty of 
getting perfectly clean, clear water and keeping 
it in this condition. Of this Mr. Dugmore, who 
has done probably the best work on fishes of 
anybody in this country, or elsewhere for that 
matter, has considerable to say, and, as he is 
undoubtedly an authority, I will quote him:— 

“ Absolute clearness of water is highly desir- 
able but almost impossible to obtain. After 
straining the water so that it is clear enough for 
ordinary work in a good light take an apparently 
clean stone, not a smooth marble of course, but 
an ordinary moderately rough stone, drop it in 
the aquarium, and watch the result. The water 
will be seen to be filled with a muddy substance, 
and, instead of crystal-like clearness, we have a 


214 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


murky-looking water that is most undesirable. 
But your troubles have just commenced. Add 
some fresh, green aquatic plants, and you will 
notice that they too give off scum and muddy 
material, even though they may be placed in the 
water with the greatest care. Now when the 
fish runs amuck through these beautiful plants 
and really disturbs the mud and scum, the water 
has lost all its clearness, so that it is impossible 
to photograph a fish through it. With tropical 
aquatic vegetation the difficulty is even greater 
than with our more simple northern plants. 
“The beautiful ‘sea-feathers’ that one sees 
waving about with every movement of the water 
in the tropical seas appear to be a clear, clean 
purple or yellow; but on putting them into 
an aquarium they will be found to discolor the 
water immediately. ‘Sea-caps’ are even worse, 
and sponges cause so much trouble that after a 
few discouraging attempts we give up the idea 
of using them. What, you may ask, is the 
remedy for these difficulties? The only thing 
I have found to answer at all is to thoroughly 
clean each leaf by washing it with a soft cloth. 
It is a task requiring great patience; but once 
the plant is really clean it will remain so for sev- 
eral days, requiring only to be well rinsed in 
clear water each time it is used. Between whiles 
it is, of course, kept in clear water, which should 


Photographing Fish 215 


be as near as possible the temperature to which 
the plant is accustomed. Over-warm water will 
cause the plant to lose its color and become cov- 
ered with scum. Never put any plant, stone, or 
in fact any accessory into the aquarium until you 
have ascertained that it is free from scum and 
other foreign matter. 

“Stones, especially those that are rough and 
honeycombed, require to be scrubbed with a hard 
brush and sand until they are perfectly clean. 
Sand, if it is necessary to use it, may be cleaned 
by throwing a little at a time into a bucketful of 
water. The part that does not immediately sink 
should be emptied out. This must be repeated 
until only the clean, heavy sand remains. But 
even this should not be used until you have a 
quiet fish to photograph. A restless fish will 
disturb the sand, which in sinking will fall on the 
fish; so that if he remains still enough to be pho- 
tographed, he will be covered with a fine deposit 
of sand, and, needless to say, this will entirely 
spoil the picture. Occasionally one finds a fish 
so well behaved that he will allow this deposit to 
be swept off, staying quiet the meanwhile. Such 
fish are very rare. A piece of white coral looks 
so clean that one is tempted to place it in the 
water without previous washing, and too late we 
discover our mistake.” 

It has been my experience that a good plan 


216 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


for preventing the fish from disturbing the plants 
is to put but a few in the compartment in which 
he is confined and the majority immediately back 
of the glass partition. This shows no difference, 
for if the confining apartment is made sufficiently 
narrow, the fish will be practically against the 
plants, and of course the glass partition will not 
show. This arrangement also has the advantage 
of adding perspective and distance to the pic- 
ture, thus giving ita much more natural aspect. 
In selecting the accessories to be used with each 
fish, always choose those that are native to the 
habitat of the fish and, if possible, use the plants 
among which he is most often found. To do 
this knowingly one must be somewhat conver- 
sant with the habits of his subject, as I have 
already said. 

The front glass of the aquarium must always 
be kept absolutely clear and clean, free from 
marks of any kind and from the accumulation 
of moisture on the outside, for it is astonishing 
with what distinctness such marks will show in 
the picture and how easily that same picture can 
be spoiled by them. 

The temperature of the water used is some- 
thing that must not be overlooked, or about 
which we cannot afford to be careless, for a fish 
will often die in a very short time if a sudden 
change of ten or fifteen degrees is made in the 


Photographing Fish 217 


water. Therefore, we must have the water in 
which we place him as near the temperature of 
the water from which he was taken as possible; 
also this must be constantly changed in order 
that it may be always fresh. Above all, never 
try to place salt-water fish in fresh water, or fresh- 
water fish in salt water. 

It may easily be seen from the amount of prep- 
aration necessary that the photography of fish 
is not accomplished without much tedious work 
and trouble. This is more or less true of all 
the branches of nature work, but perhaps more so 
in this than in any other. It is work that requires 
the utmost patience and care, for it must not be 
done hurriedly, and we cannot afford to overlook 
any of the smaller details. 

I wish to warn the beginner before he starts 
that the preparation of the aquarium and the 
accessories to be placed in it is by far the 
easiest part. When he has finished all this, his 
troubles are but beginning, for in the catching 
and handling of his subjects and the final pho- 
tographing lie the principal difficulties. 

In catching the fish, first of all, a hook and line 
should never be used when it is possible to take 
them in any other way, for, especially with the 
smaller fish, the hook is not only apt to tear the 
gills, but will often injure the fish to such an 
extent as to cause it to quickly die. As soon 


218 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


as caught they should be placed in a live car 
and kept in the water, in the shade, until wanted, 
when they can be removed with a landing-net. 

In handling the fish always use the greatest 
care not to hold them too tightly or rub off any 
of their scales, which, in many species, is a very 
easy thing to do. Also, for your own comfort, 
take care that the sharp spines of the dorsal 
fin do not stick into you, for, with some species, 
these are somewhat poisonous, and the wound 
made by them is always more or less painful. 
Many of the forms of jellyfish are poisonous 
to the touch, causing a sensation to the skin as 
though the hand had been brushed heavily with 
nettles. 

Having caught the fish you want to photo- 
graph, set up your aquarium and camera in 
some place where the sunlight will fall directly 
through the front glass of the aquarium. Put 
in your water and accessories, and in arranging 
the latter, too much care cannot be used, as the 
setting must be as natural as possible, and upon 
it depends much of the success of the picture. 
As I have already said, most of these accessories 
should be placed back of and close to the par- 
tition glass, with only a very few in the compart- 
ment in which you are going to place the fish. 
Now select the specimen upon which you are 
going to make your first exposure, and lift him 


Photographing Fish 219 


carefully from the car with the landing net. 
Take him quickly in your hand, holding him 
firmly but with not too strong a clasp, and place 
him gently in the compartment arranged to 
receive him. At first he will undoubtedly be 
extremely restless and will swim rapidly from 
one end of the compartment to the other look- 
ing for some means of escape, and you must 
wait until he quiets down before anything can 
be done. When he has finally satisfied himself 
that he cannot get away, he will probably sink 
to the bottom and sulk. Now you can focus 
upon him, and, in doing so, be sure that there 
are no reflections from the sun’s rays upon the 
glass, for this would entirely ruin the picture. 
Also be careful to note just what portion of the 
aquarium you can see upon the ground glass, 
so that you may be sure to have the fish in 
that portion when the exposure is made. It is 
rather discouraging, after having spent much 
time in photographing a subject, to find, upon 
development, that only one-half of his image 
is upon the plate, and maybe not that much, 
and it does not make the discouragement any 
the less to realize that it was our own stupidity 
that caused it. 

After having focussed to your satisfaction, in- 
sert the plate-holder, draw the slide, set the shutter, 
and then cover the camera well with a dark cloth 


220 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


to prevent the possible fogging of the plate, for 
you may have to wait for some little time before 
you can get your fish into the exact position in 
which you wish him. Only those species that 
live on the bottom should be photographed in 
that position, for with the others it carries the 
idea of a dead specimen laid there, besides show- 
ing the fish under false conditions. 

Some fish will quickly become accustomed to 
their artificial surroundings and will assume the 
desired position, if left entirely alone, in a very 
short time. Others will have to be coaxed to 
do so, either by gently pushing them with a 
stick or by lifting them repeatedly from the - 
bottom until they remain suspended in the 
water long enough for you to make the ex- 
posure. With the best-behaved fish it will usu- 
ally mean a considerable wait, and you must keep 
your patience. Above all, never make the expos- 
ure until the fish is in exactly the position that you 
desire. You will be fully repaid for the waiting by 
the much better results which you will thus obtain. 

There are three things necessary to be careful 
about before releasing the shutter: that the fish 
is entirely in the field chosen; that he is no 
farther from or nearer to the front glass than he 
was when you focussed; and that his fins, espe- 
cially the dorsal one, are well spread, for the latter 
precaution not only adds to the beauty of the 


Photographing Fish 221 


picture, but is also an aid from a scientific stand- 
point in determining the species. 

The exposure necessary is entirely according to 
whether your specimen is of a quiet turn of mind 
or not. Usually from 4 to 3: of a second will be 
found fast enough, but occasionally greater speed 
is necessary, and sometimes a specimen will remain 
still enough for a sufficient length of time to allow 
of a time exposure, but it is best never to depend 
upon this. 

It is always a good plan to make several expos- 
ures on the same specimen. This decreases the 
chances of failure, and should each negative prove 
good the change of the position of your subject 
will make each one of them valuable; while if but 
one exposure is made, and that should turn out 
poorly, you will have had all your trouble and 
used your time and patience for nothing. More- 
over, many fish change their coloring and markings 
very materially, at times often suddenly, and ap- 
parently without cause or reason. It is sometimes 
done, however, as a means of protection by con- 
forming more nearly to the colors of their sur- 
roundings, and, when possible, pictures showing 
the various phases should be made. The fish of 
the tropical waters are the ones that show the 
most pronounced changes, and with some these 
changes are so decided as to completely alter the 
appearance of the specimen. 


222 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


I have spoken thus far in this chapter entirely 
of the photographing of fishes, but there are many 
other forms of aquatic life that can be successfully 
photographed, and which make most instructive 
as well as interesting pictures. Any of the jelly- 
fish family may be photographed in the aquarium, 
bute they, 
make rather 
difficult sub- 
jects. In the 
first place 
they are ex- 
tremely del- 
icate, many 
of them so 
muchso that 
when lifted 
in the hand 
they will slip 
away  be- 
tween the 
fingers, not 
as a whole, but tearing away in pieces until there is 
nothing left. Consequently, in taking them from 
their native element, they must be dipped up with 
a quantity of the water and thus transferred to the 
aquarium, Moreover, it is best never to let any 
of them come into contact with the skin of the 
hand or arm, for, as I have already said, many of 


Jellyfish. 


Photographing Fish 223 


them are poisonous; and while this poison is not 
particularly virulent, its effects are often extremely 
disagreeable. 

These forms of aquatic life are, mostly, nearly 
transparent or with delicate tones of pink, blue, 
violet, and yellow. This, naturally, adds to the 
difficulty of successfully photographing them; but 
when one does succeed in obtaining a good pic- 
ture of one, it is remarkably beautiful and should 
fully repay him for the trouble. They must al- 
ways be photographed against a black background, 
for otherwise they would not show at all. A 
piece of board or zinc, coated upon one side with 
asphalt or any other waterproof paint that will 
give an absolutely dead black, can be used for 
this background and slipped in at the back of the 
tank. The sides should be left white in order to 
reflect as much light as possible. When using 
this black background, it will be found almost im- 
possible to entirely eliminate all reflection from 
the picture, for the glass front of the aquarium 
against the black background forms an almost 
perfect mirror that will reflect the camera and any 
other object that is in front of it. These reflec- 
tions are lessened by the use of a perfectly dead- 
black background, and by careful manipulation 
and the placing of your camera you can get rid 
of them entirely, or at least cause them to appear in 
such positions as will not interfere with the picture. 


224 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


The Portuguese man-of-war is an interesting 
little fellow to photograph and should be pictured 
with his sail set to the fullest extent. The sea 
anemones form another most interesting group 
and should always be photographed attached 
to the original support upon which they were 
found. These latter do not need the black 
background, and it is best never to use it except 
in such cases as are found to be absolutely neces- 
sary in order to show your subject to the best 
advantage. 

The sea-urchins, corals, sponges, and the 
thousand and one other things that are to be 
found in the ocean can be photographed if one 
wishes to do so. In fact, there is an immense 
field here that has hardly been touched and that 
offers unlimited possibilities to any one who wishes 
to enter it. 

It must be borne in mind, however, that all 
forms of aquatic life are more or less delicate and 
will not stand rough handling. Many of them, as 
the jellyfishes, cannot be taken from the water 
with safety, and any of them, even the most hardy 
of the fishes, are easily injured, so that as little 
handling of them as possible is always advisable. 
Above all, never allow them to remain out of 
water for any length of time, for a few minutes 
out of its native element often means death to one 
of these creatures. 


Photographing Fish 205 


If a negative shows motion of the subject, or is 
blurred from being out of focus, throw it away and 
make another one. Clearness of outline and 
sharpness of detail are more necessary to the 
value of the picture in this than in any other 
branch of nature photography; and although you 
may be tempted to keep a negative that is not 


Sea Anemones. 


perfect in these respects, you will find yourself 
better satisfied, in the end, and will consider the 
time well spent if you will discard it and keep on 
doing this until you have reached perfection. 
Poor work is undesirable and is of less value than 
the usual poor drawing. So, if you are too impa- 
tient never to be satisfied with any results other 
than the very best, you had better lay your camera 
aside and try some less difficult line of work, for 
Q 


226 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


there are already altogether too many poor workers 
in the field. 

If you are serious, however, and wish to do 
some work that will last and be of value, then 
there is nothing that offers better opportunities 
than this same field of aquatic photography. 


CHAPTER XIII 


PHOTOGRAPHING REPTILES, ETC. 


Ir one can but overcome the instinctive abhor- 
rence and fear which most people have of snakes, 
and learn to know them as the beautiful and 
harmless creatures which most of them are, he 
will find that they make the most interesting sub- 
jects possible for nature photography. They are, 
in every respect, preéminently graceful, and every 
position which they assume is a naturally artistic 
pose, for a snake is never awkward in any of his 
movements. 

Of course, I realize that with many people the 
horror of a snake is too deep-seated to be easily 
eradicated, and I have known some otherwise 
courageous people whom the mere sight of a 
snake would affect most powerfully. To expect 
these people to handle one would be entirely out 
of the question. In fact, I know one man, who 
has lived very close to nature all of his life, who 
would rather walk a mile out of his way than en- 
counter one of these creatures. 

Since time immemorial the snake has been 
the symbol of all that is most vile and obnoxious, 


227 


228 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


and since the days of the Garden of Eden fable 
to the present time he has been persecuted with- 
out just cause wherever found. It is remarkable 
that he is not already extinct, for with most 
people the first thought, upon seeing one, is to kill 
him as quickly and thoroughly as possible. His 
habits and characteristics are less known to most 


Milk Snake. 


people than are those of many of our wild things, 
and it is a common belief that every snake is 
poisonous. I well remember the utter horror 
with which several country dwellers once watched 
me pick up a three-foot garter snake which I had 
found them stoning to death. When they saw 
what I intended to do, they kindly warned me 
that it was sure death, and I verily believe that 


Photographing Reptiles, etc. 229 


they fully expected to see me bitten and drop dead 
before their very eyes. I tried to explain to them 
that the creature was harmless, but they would 
not be convinced and followed me with their eyes, 
their mouths wide open, as long as I was in sight. 

The fact of the matter is that most snakes are 
not only harmless, but perform their part in helping 
along the day’s work by killing off innumerable 
rodents that are injurious to the crops; and, did 
the farmer but know it, he could have no better 
allies than the snakes. Instead of allowing them 
the run of the farm, as he should do, he loses no 
opportunity to kill one, to his own loss. 

One of the first requisites in snake photography 
is to lose this instinctive dread of your subjects 
and learn to handle them fearlessly. Of course, 
one must know the snakes thoroughly before he 
attempts to do this, else the results might be dis- 
agreeable should he pick up a copperhead or other 
poisonous species under the impression that it 
was not a dangerous one. 

In the Eastern United States we have but four 
snakes, however, that are dangerous: the rattle- 
snake, the copperhead, the moccasin, and a 
little snake that inhabits the far South only and is 
known as the coral snake. Of these the rattle- 
snake is the most deadly, but none of them can be 
handled with impunity. All the rest of the snakes 
are harmless, and although, when cornered, they 


230 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


will strike with all the animosity of a poisonous 
species, even going so far as to take hold with 
their teeth, they have no fangs, secrete no poison, 
and therefore their bite is to be no more feared 
than that of a mosquito. To illustrate the neces- 
sity of knowing which snakes can be handled 
without danger, I will relate a little story which 


Garter Snake. 


reflects somewhat upon my own good judgment 
and common sense. Some years ago, when I 
was younger and knew more, or thought I did, 
than I do now, I happened, in Florida, upon one 
of the coral snakes mentioned above. It is a 
beautiful little creature and one that would attract 
anybody’s attention as the one I found did mine. 
I picked it up, for I had never had much fear of 


Photographing Reptiles, etc. 231 


snakes, and carried it home with me, where I 
allowed it the free run of my room for several 
weeks. It would not eat, however, and finally 
died, much to my sorrow; and it was not until 
some months afterward that I discovered this 
species to be extremely venomous. It is true 
that the little knowledge which I had of the 
snakes was a dangerous thing and not sufficient 
to warn me against this one. Had it not been 
that this particular species is hard to anger and 
will not bite except under great provocation, I 
might not now be here to tell the tale. 

Of the rattlesnakes, of course, there are many 
different varieties. They are all easily told by’ 
their unvarying habit of signalling the fact of 
their presence to any one whom they may consider 
a trespasser upon their domain. I am free to 
confess that I have never had any great desire to 
hunt these creatures with a camera, although, 
should the opportunity offer, I should unhesitat- 
ingly do so. Many excellent photographs have 
been made, however, by those who have no 
particular fear of them. 

Mr. Sumner W. Matteson, in the Cosmopolitan 
for April, 1898, describes a visit which he made to 
a rattler’s den, for the purpose of securing speci- 
mens and pictures, that for cool daring I think 
deserves a reward. He says that “ Having had 
some experience with rattlers in Montana, Iowa, 


232 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


and Minnesota, I was anxious to know more 
of them, and accepted an invitation to a fa- 
mous den at Fortification Rock, in Routt County, 
Colorado. ... Here a trachyte dike several 
miles in length extends westward from Fortifica- 
tion Creek, standing fifty feet above the ridge on 
the north side and fully one hundred and fifty on 
the south. Much of the wall has fallen over to the 
lower side, making great piles of débris and loose 
rocks, at the foot of which thousands of rattle- 
snakes make their winter home. The land is 
still ‘public land’ and offered to any citizen of 
the United States complying with the laws relat- 
ing thereto, but as yet the nearest ranch is two 
miles below and that deserted because the snakes 
would insist upon coming in at the open door or 
through knot holes in the floor and were always 
to be found in the boot box.” In this den Mr. 
Matteson with some companions, one of whom 
was a little girl, spent the greater part of a day, 
securing not only some excellent photographs, but 
some valuable specimens. 

Mr Wo HE Backusim) “(Country lite sin 
America,” gives some exciting accounts of rattle- 
snake hunting with a camera. It seems that 
once, while on a grizzly hunt in California, he 
came literally face to face with a big rattler, for it 
was coiled on a rock at alevel with his head and 
but about a foot away. He says: “One of the 


Photographing Reptiles, etc. 233 


things that came flashing through my brain as 
we glared into each other’s eyes during that 
extremely long instant of time was ‘ What a pic- 
ture the fellow would make!’ What an eye! 
Never before had I been so close to a free and 
angry rattler. I saw no blazing eye darting fire, 
that I had read about, nor was there any of the 
terrible fury in it with which the timid deer turns 
on his pursuer when brought to bay. It was clear 
and brilliant, but it seemed to me cold and cal- 
culating and, oh! so fiercely intent. Before I left 
that canon I made up my mind I would have a 
camera. 

‘Next summer found me on the road to the 
San Bernardino Mountains, armed with a four by 
five camera of the ‘press-the-button’ type.” 

He had some little trouble in finding the 
rattlers now that he wanted them, but finally his 
quest was rewarded. 

“He was already coiled, and as I dismounted 
he began to sound his rattle. He stood his 
ground fearlessly, as is generally the case, knowing 
his deadly power and probably knowing the fear 
in which he is held. The increasing darkness 
prevented any photographing on the spot, and 
the only thing to be done was to take him 
alive. After an exciting struggle among the 
rocks I succeeded in pinning him down with a 
forked stick... . I seized him by the neck and 


234 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


dropped him into an open bag, and my first 
‘model’ was captured. 

“ Selecting an open spot the next day, I spread 
out a large piece of canvas in order to get a clear, 
smooth background. I set the shutter of the 
camera and turned the focussing scale down to 
two feet, as I had to work at that distance to get 
a picture large enough to be of any value. I then 
opened the bag and dumped Mr. Rattler out upon 
the canvas. At this unceremonious treatment he 
coiled up for a fight and began rattling. Hastily 
grabbing up my camera I tried to take a photo- 
graph of him, when he struck the camera front, 
breaking one fang, as I afterward discovered. 
This negative was a blur, for I pressed the but- 
ton with a convulsive grip. The next was the 
same ; in fact, the entire set was a failure, partly 
from lack of knowlege of how to handle a rattle- 
snake and partly from inexperience with a camera. 
The many reasons of failure are well known to 
those who have photographed animals of any 
kind. 

“ After repeated trials with different specimens, 
I found it not only took infinite time and patience 
to get a characteristic pose that showed the best 
form of coil for striking, but that I had to 
approach with a steady, easy motion till I got up 
to the right distance. ... I have now been study- 
ing rattlesnakes for several years, and in the sum- 


Photographing Reptiles, etc. 235 


mer of 1901 I went out better prepared than before 
to watch them and get photographs; but before 
I had fairly started I had the misfortune to be bit- 
ten by one. This cut short my studies and nearly 
ended them altogether, as I was far from help 
except a boy who was with me. But it has added 
to my interest, and I expect to go again next sum- 
mer with a camera better suited to that class of 
work.” 

Had Mr. Backus on his first trip been supplied 
with the proper outfit for doing this work, he 
would have found less trouble and obtained better 
results. It is this kind of experience that proves 
to be the best teacher. 

Snakes, especially the harmless ones, are easily 
tamed, and I have often in an hour or two gotten 
one of them so well acquainted with me that he 
would stay quietly in almost any position in which 
I placed him. 

Quick motion always scares a snake much 
more than any amount of handling or loud noise. 
A rattlesnake is a gentleman and will allow of a 
close approach if one but shows entire fearlessness 
and moves slowly and gently, but a quick jump 
or any sudden movement will cause him to strike 
instantly. In this fact lies most of the secret of 
success in working with snakes, and would we but 
bear it in mind we would find them far from the 
deep-dyed villains they are painted. 


236 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


In work afield in this branch the reflex camera 
is often necessary, but muchcan be done with 
the ordinary tripod box. I have often taken 
photographs of snakes by confining them in my 
carrying case or holding them in my hand while 
setting up and focussing my camera upon some 
suitable spot, then after having quieted my subject 
somewhat, I have placed him on the spot chosen 
and have found that often he would remain there 
long enough for me to even stop down my lens 
and make a time exposure; for when a snake is 
still he is absolutely motionless. 

The best method, however, is to photograph 
them in an indoor studio, for then they can be 
brought home, studied and photographed at one’s 
leisure; and any one who will try this will find that 
they make not only good subjects, but interesting 
pets as well. The studio should be arranged in 
some place with a good, strong diffused light, as 
the direct sunlight is apt to give bad reflections 
on the scales of your subject. 

It is well to have a posing stand on which to 
photograph your “sitter,” as it is more convenient 
than to do so on the ground or floor and the re- 
sults are likely to be much better. This should 
be about two feet high, so as to allow the camera 
to point downward toward it, at an angle, from a 
slight elevation. It should be at least two feet 
square, so that the edges may not show on the 


Photographing Reptiles, etc. 237 


plate, and with large snakes even this will be 
found too small. On this stand, with a few simple 
accessories, such as some pieces of sod, stones, 
leaves, and small plants, any kind of an artificial 
setting may be made. This should be arranged 
to look as natural as possible, but any one can do 
it by the exercise of a little care. A snake that 
has been kept in the studio for two or three days, 
until he has become accustomed to your presence 
and his surroundings and to being handled, will 
nearly always allow himself to be placed in the 
desired position on the stand and will stay there 
motionless for a sufficient length of time to allow 
you not only to focus properly upon him, but 
you can stop down the lens so as to get clear 
definition of the entire field and give as long an 
exposure as is then necessary. 

Of course, there is always the chance of the 
snake deciding it is about time for him to make a 
move when the exposure is about half over and 
then you must try again, but these are the trials 
that you must expect. 

Naturally, this kind of a studio is impracticable 
when photographs of the snake striking or ready 
for a strike are wanted. Then, of course, it is 
necessary to have the strongest light possible, for 
a snake’s movements in coiling, striking, etc., are 
very quick. One can easily move his posing 
stand out into the direct sunlight, however, when 


238 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


such pictures are needed or when the subject 
proves too refractory to allow of photographing 
him indoors. 

While I do not believe in photographing birds 
or animals in a studio, I do think that snakes can 
be best photographed in this manner, for they do 


Common Frog. 


not show their fear so readily as do the warm- 
blooded animals and they always immediately as- 
sume natural poses when released from the hand. 

For the smaller snakes, the lizards, frogs, toads, 
etc., a very convenient arrangement is a small 
glass cage, at one end of which the lens may be 
inserted. One that is suitable, easy to make, and 
costs but little consists of a rectangular case, 


Photographing Reptiles, etc. 239 


preferably with glass sides and wooden ends and 
bottom. In one of the ends an opening is cut 
and covered with strong rubber cloth with a slit 
through which the lens of the camera may be 
thrust. The bottom of the box should be covered 
with earth or neutral-tinted plaster of Paris, which 
should be so rounded at the back and corners as 
to show no sign of the junction of the back and 


Snapping Turtle. 


bottom. The back should be painted a neutral 
tint also. The box should be about two to two 
and a half feet long. This will allow a sufficient 
distance between the lens and the subject. A 
central partition of glass can be provided, to be 
slipped into position when it is necessary to con- 
fine the subject to the back of the box, and this 
will not interfere with the photograph provided 
the glass is perfectly clear and clean. The top 


240 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


should be a piece of glass simply laid on so that 
the subjects can be easily admitted and there will 
be no obstruction to the passage of light. 

This cage should be supported at a sufficient 
height on any small stand or table, and by the in- 
troduction of twigs, stones, grass, pieces of wood, 
leaves, etc., natural conditions may be simulated 
and most excellent results obtained. 

It is most discouraging to try to photograph 
frogs, toads, or lizards out of doors, for, although 
they may sit quietly and allow us to focus upon 
them, they are most liable to jump or move away 
just as we are ready to make the exposure. In 
order to obtain a sufficiently large image of them 
it is often necessary to work at such close range 
that the lens must be stopped down to get both 
them and the background in sharp focus. This 
makes it impossible to use the reflex camera. In 
fact I never use this camera with any of these 
subjects, as I find I can obtain so much better re- 
sults by carrying them home and photographing 
them in the manner I have described. 

The aquarium, which I have described in 
Chapter XII, is a useful adjunct in this connec- 
tion, for many of the newts, salamanders, and 
lizards are water creatures and as such should be 
photographed in their native element. Frogs, too, 
may be photographed in the water as well as on 
land, and, should one desire a series of pictures 


Photographing Reptiles, etc. 241 


(which, by the way, is most interesting) showing 
the different stages of the frog from the egg up, it 
can be successfully accomplished only in such an 
aquarium. During the tadpole stage they can be 
kept from the bottom and near the front by a 
piece of glass inserted at an angle and with its 
lower edge resting against the glass front of the 
aquarium three or four inches below the surface of 
the water. Care must 
be taken, however, 
when working in the 
direct sunlight, not to 
get disagreeable reflec- 
tions from this glass 
which might spoil the 
picture. Otherwise it 
cannot be seen, and 
these reflections are 
not apt to show except 
when a dark kack- 
ground is used, which 
is never advisable. 

Of all the exasperating subjects in the whole 
range of nature work, I think the box tortoise is 
probably without exception the worst. His fault 
lies in remaining too still. He will withdraw 
himself into his case, and no amount of coaxing 
will induce him to emerge until he is ready. I 
have often waited for, what seemed to me, an inter- 

R 


Tree Toad ‘‘singing.”’ 


242 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


minable length of time for one to show his head, 
only to have him in the end stick out the tip of his 
beak and one claw sufficiently to shove himself 
away from the camera and entirely out of range. 

The snapping and water turtles are much 
better subjects, as they seem to be far less exclu- 
sive than are their land 
relatives. 

In this particular 
branch are many ex- 
cellent instances of 
protective coloring 
which make most in- 
teresting photographs. 

Of such are the 
chameleons, the hylas 
or tree-toads, and the 
wood-frogs, all of which 
resemble their natural 
surroundings, often so closely as to make it difh- 
cult to distinguish them. 

There are many instances of this protective 
coloring among the smaller wild things. It is one 
of nature’s many schemes for giving to her off- 
spring a means of defence against their numerous 
enemies, and truthful pictures, which are not al- 
ways obtained by means of a pencil and brush, 
of those creatures that affect the color, shape, or 
markings of their surroundings are not only inter- 
esting but valuable. 


Common Toad. 


Showing protective coloration. 


Photographing Reptiles, etc. 243 


If we would do good work along all lines of 
nature photography, we must bear in mind that 
there is no creature, no matter how mean or lowly 
he may be, but has interest for somebody; and al- 
though we may not care for the snakes, lizards, 
and such creatures, and think them repulsive, there 
are many who do not have the same idea of them 
as do we, and therefore good photographs of them 
or of any of nature’s children, even the smallest 
and meanest, are always in demand and have their 
value. 


CHAE TE RSI 


PHOTOGRAPHING WILD FLOWERS, CUT AND GROWING 


CONSIDERED as a means of artistic expression, 
flowers offer a greater opportunity to the photog- 
rapher than does any other subject in the whole 
range of photography. They are more adaptable 
to arrangement, and, to any one of any pretence to 
artistic ability, they offer unlimited possibilities 
for beautiful photographs. It is not always the 
rarer or more gorgeous blooms that make the 
finest subjects either, for it is often the case that 
the commonest roadside “ weed ” affords material 
from which the best picture can be made if we 
but know how to handle it. 

There is the advantage in this work of a great 
diversity of form and coloring, and the foliage also 
presents much that is interesting in its almost in- 
finite variety of shape, and tones of greens, browns, 
and bronzes. 

But, outside of the artistic possibilities of this 
branch of photography, it is of considerable value 
from a scientific standpoint. 

It has been a source of wonder to me that 
botanists do not make a greater use of the camera 

244 


Photographing Wild Flowers 245 


to aid them in their studies, for it is certain that 
by no other means can such perfect illustrations 
be obtained; and, for an herbarium, such pictures 
are, it would seem to me, invaluable. Not only is 
it possible to obtain pictures of the plant in its 
entirety, but each small part of the flower itself is 
capable of being photographed and afterward 
enlarged to any size desired, giving the student 
a chance to study carefully and at his leisure the 
minute construction of the plants upon which he 
is at work; while for comparison and identification 
no drawing or description can equal a first-class 
photograph. 

Not only to botanists, however, would I recom- 
mend the photography of wild flowers, but to any 
one who has a desire for instructive amusement. 
Not one person in a hundred has the least idea 
of the number of really beautiful wild flowers that 
each year adorn the fields and woods immediately 
surrounding our homes. 

They, of course, know the daisy, dandelion, 
thistle, and those more common plants that bloom 
by thousands through our fields and along our 
roadsides; but let them create some reason for 
becoming interested in the flora and they will be 
surprised to find how many blooms they will 
discover which they have never before seen or, at 
least, noticed. 

But, in order to have any success in flower 


246 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


Shinleaf in Tangle of Herbage. 


Photographing Wild Flowers 247 


photography, one must be possessed of a little 
sense of the artistic, for the flowers should be 
grouped in such a manner as to show to the 
best advantage and not thrown together without 
thought as to their arrangement. 

There are two ways in which flowers can be 
photographed: cut and growing. The latter is 
useful in showing their manner of growth, and 
the former in presenting the blossom on a larger 
scale and more in detail. 

In photographing cut flowers the greatest diffi- 
culty with which we have to contend lies in the 
fact that they so easily wilt. Especially is this 
true of those plants that grow in water or in 
very damp soil. 

I once spent nearly an entire week and dozens 
of plates in the attempt to get a good picture 
of one of our common flowering water plants. 
Specimen after specimen I carried home to no 
avail. It seemed to be impossible to do any- 
thing with it, for the flowers invariably wilted and 
dropped off, and the leaves curled up within ten 
minutes after it was removed from the soil. Plac- 
ing it in water or in dampened sand, or, in fact, the 
use of any of the methods by which flowers are 
revived, appeared to have not the least beneficial 
effect. 

I was almost in despair of accomplishing any- 
thing with this species until one day I chanced 


248 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


upon a plant that was growing in a somewhat 
drier place than usual, and which, seemingly, was 
more hardy than any I had yet tried. By wrap- 


Blue Flag. 


ping it in wet cloths 
and carrying it in a 
case entirely protected 
from the sun’s rays, I 
managed to get it 
home in good condi- 
tion. Once there I 
immediately made an 
exposure and, upon de- 
velopment of the plate, 
I found that my efforts 
were at last crowned 
with the success for 
which I had been striv- 
ing. 

This but serves to 
illustrate the point that 
I wish to impress upon 
all nature workers, in 
this as well as any of 
the other branches, that 
persistency generally 


wins in the end. One must never acknowledge 
himself defeated until he has tried every possible 
means of gaining the result which he wishes, and 
even then he should go back and try them all 


over again, 


Photographing Wild Flowers 249 


The water plants are the most difficult to work 
with, for even if placed in water immediately 
after being picked, the leaves will generally dry 
and curl up and the flowers die and drop off in 
a very short time. It is necessary, in order to get 
a photograph of them at all, to make the exposure 
as soon after picking them as possible. 

With those flowers growing in drier soil this 
difficulty is not nearly so great, for, no matter 
if they have become badly wilted while being 
carried home, they will, in most cases, revive in 
a few hours after being placed in water. With 
these flowers it has been my practice, generally, 
to pick them and arrange them in the groups in 
which I wish to photograph them in the late after- 
noon and allow them to stand over night, doing 
the photographing the next morning. By doing 
so they are usually in as fresh condition when 
I come to work with them as when they were first 
picked. 

In gathering plants for subjects, always choose 
the best flowered specimens that you can find 
and pick them with as long stems as possible. 
It is best to carry them home in a botany box 
or some other kind of closed case, for they will 
wilt less than if carried in the hand; and if, before 
putting them in water, about an inch of the end 
of each stem is cut off they will revive much 
more. quickly. 


250 Photography for the. Sportsman Naturalist 


Cut flowers must always be photographed in- 
doors. It is necessary to get as clear a photo- 
graph with as sharp an outline and as much 
detail as is possible, in order that it shall have 
any value; and as the least movement on the 
part of the plant 
during exposure 
will completely ruin 
this, it is obvious 
that the work must 
be done where there 
is absolutely no air 
stirring. Therefore 
work in the open 
is here out of the 
question. 

As the exposure 
is, necessarily, long, 
movement on the 
part of the plant is, 
under any circum- 
stances, one of the 
chief difficulties, but 
by working indoors the chances for movement 
are naturally lessened materially. It is often the 
case, however, that a plant will voluntarily change 
its position during the exposure, perhaps imper- 
ceptibly to the eye, but sufficiently to utterly de- 
stroy all sharpness of detail and make the negative 


Jack-in-pulpit. 


Photographing Wild Flowers 251 


worthless. The least jar, such as made by a per- 
son walking across the floor, will also cause 
them to move, and I have even found that, with 
some of the more delicate flowers, the vibration 
of my body, if I stood too close to them, would 
cause them to tremble. The flowers must be 
absolutely still before they can be successfully 
photographed. 

I always do this work in the room of an un- 
occupied building where there will be no 
unexpectedly slammed doors or heavy footfalls to 
jar my subjects. During the exposure I always 
remain as far from the flower stand as possible, 
and I sit down. One can more easily keep 
absolutely still seated than standing, for there is 
always a tension to the body when standing, 
especially if the attitude is at all constrained, that 
causes it to vibrate. Some may think that all 
such precaution is nonsense, but I can assure 
them that it is not. I learned the necessity of it 
through the bitter experience of many wasted 
plates, and I am now giving the results of that 
experience to those who are about to enter the 
same paths. 

One might think that, in comparison to 
photographing animal life, the work upon floral 
life should be easy. It is much easier, as- would 
naturally be the case in the difference between 
animate and inanimate objects, but should any 


252 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


one attempt it with the impression that it is all 
plain sailing he will be speedily undeceived, and 
maybe he will not entirely enjoy the undeceiving 
process. In order to give my readers some idea 
of what they will have to contend with, I wish to 
say that I have often worked from four to six hours 
over a single flower without obtaining a satis- 
factory negative and have finally been forced to 
desist on account of waning light, and many times 
have I been compelled to hunt up a new speci- 
men of some flower, the ones I had _ having 
become wilted beyond all resuscitation while I was 
trying to obtain with them the results which I 
wished. 

One man, who has made some of the finest 
flower studies which I have ever seen, once told 
me that before he obtained a result that pleased 
him, when he first started at this work, he made 
and discarded over a thousand negatives. He 
was probably almost hypercritical, but it is much 
better to be too particular than not particular 
enough. 

I hope all this will not discourage any one, how- 
ever, or deter them from trying the work. I 
simply tell it that those who are entering the field 
of flower photography may not expect too much 
at the beginning. After having once acquired 
the knack of knowing just when and how to 
make an exposure and what length of exposure 


Photographing Wild Flowers 253 


is best suited to the different combinations of 
color in order to reproduce them in as nearly 
the correct values as possible, one steadily im- 
proves and the number of failures that he makes 
as steadily diminishes. 
The work should be 
done within two feet of 
a window (one facing 
north is the best, as the 
light from that quarter 
is apt to be much more 
steady than from any 
other), and it is a good 
idea to cover the window 
with a tightly stretched 
piece of thin cheese- 
cloth in order to soften 
the light. The flowers 
should be placed on a 
stand well at one side 
of the window, so that ane 
the light will fall upon 
them as full as possible, but not so far at the side 
as to cause any of them to be in the shadow. 
The background should be put at least a foot 
back of the flowers, so that their shadow will not 
fall upon it. There should be at least three back- 
grounds, one white, one black, and one of a 
neutral tint, and the operator must learn which 


254 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


background is best suited to the different colors 
of the flowers. 

The light should be equalized on the side 
farthest from the window by the use of white 
cardboard reflecting screens placed as close to the 
flowers as possible without showing in the picture. 

The camera used should never be smaller than 
the six and a half by eight and a half size, and an 
eight by ten is even better, for the image should 
be reproduced as nearly life size as is compatible 
with good work. A flower negative should never 
be enlarged, as a great deal of the delicate detail 
is bound to be lost in the operation. 

The make of lens used is more or less imma- 
terial, the one with which the operator is best 
acquainted being the one best suited to him. It 
should never be of less focal length than nine or 
ten inches, however, and the longer than this it 
is the better. It should also be one of the faster 
makes, as the more speedily an exposure can be 
made the less danger of the flowers moving during 
the process. 

In this work orthochromatic plates used in 
conjunction with the ray filter are an absolute 
necessity, and the slow ones are the best as giv- 
ing the truer color values. In the use of the ray 
filter, or color screen, one must carefully consider 
the color of his flowers in order to get the best 
results. A very deep-colored screen is rarely 


Photographing Wild Flowers 255 


necessary, and I have found that for all-round work 
one of a light lemon tone is the best. With blue 
or violet flowers it should always be used, with 
the yellows and oranges it gives better results, but 
with the reds it is not necessary and only tends to 
lengthen the time of exposure. With pink or 
white flowers, however, it should be used, 
especially where the color of the foliage is dark, 
in order to preserve the proper relation of tones 
between the white or pink of the flower and the 
green of the leaves. 

Now, after having arranged your flowers to your 
satisfaction, set up the camera close enough to 
give at least a two-thirds size image, — life size if 
possible. Focus upon that flower of the group 
that is nearest to the camera and then stop down 
the lens until allarein sharp focus. I have found 
it best to always work my lens at the smallest 
aperture, for, while this necessitates a longer 
exposure, it invariably gives the best results in 
delicacy and sharpness of detail. In focussing, 
always do so with the color screen in place. 

The time of exposure can only be learned by 
experience, for it is governed entirely by circum- 
stances and there is but little advice of value that 
can be given upon the subject. I have found, 
however, that under ordinary circumstances, when 
the light is strong, an exposure of about six 
or seven minutes is necessary when using the 


256 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


slow plate with the color screen. This with a 
nine and a half inch Goerz lens stopped down 
to F. 64. It all depends upon the speed of the 
lens, the condition of the light, the density of 
the color screen, the distance the lens is from 
the flowers, and the color of the flowers. Dark- 
colored flowers need a much longer exposure 
than do those which are light in tone, and this 
must always be taken into consideration. 

The light of early morning or late afternoon 
is often deceptive, seeming to be much stronger 
than it really is, and therefore the best time for 
work is from about the middle of the forenoon to 
the middle of the afternoon, or, say, about four 
hours of the middle of the day. The light at 
these hours, when the day is clear, is almost 
absolutely steady. Never attempt to do any work 
upon a cloudy day or one upon which the light is 
at all variable, for you will find that you will lose 
many plates through not being able to judge 
accurately the length of time for a correct ex- 
posure. 

Always remember that it is better to slightly 
overexpose than to err in the opposite direction, 
for an underexposed plate is almost useless, much 
of the fine detail being entirely lost, while with an 
overexposed plate one can so develop it as 
to make an excellent negative; that is, if the over 
exposure is not too great. Of course a plate that 


Photographing Wild Flowers AG 


is correctly exposed is always the best, for that 
needs no special manipulation in the development. 

Many people use a vertical stand, such as was 
spoken of in Chapter V, for this work, and arrange 
their flowers by laying them on a piece of clear 
glass with the background a foot or so below. 
The flowers are less apt to move by this arrange- 
ment, but they cannot be made to look so natural as 
when they are 
photographed 
erect. 

The arrange- 
ment of the 
flowers is be- 
yond doubt one 
of the most diff- 
cult parts of the 
whole opera- (iia io 
tion; ana) it. is Spring Orehis. 
here that one 
can give full scope to whatever of the artistic 
sensibilities he may possess. In this arrange- 
ment one can follow no given instructions, but 
must rely entirely upon his own ideas, and de- 
pending upon whether these ideas be good or bad 
lies much of the success of the picture from an 
artistic standpoint. Some flowers are so stiff that 
it is impossible to impart to them one iota of 
grace, but in this very stiffness there often lies 

s 


258 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


great beauty if one can but see it and understand 
how to group them so as to bring it out. 

One little suggestion may be of service: never 
crowd the flowers; much better to have too few 
than too many. A single spray is often sufh- 
cient and, almost invariably, two, or at the most 
three or four, give better results than do a dozen 
or fifteen. Occasionally it is necessary to use 
more than this, but very rarely, and one’s judg- 
ment should tell him when to do so. 

I use bottles to hold the flowers, as I find that, 
their necks being small, the flowers can more 
easily be made to stand erect than in an ordinary 
vase. It is well to use two or three of these 
bottles for a group, for if only one bottle is used 
it shows the stems of the flowers all rising from 
the same point. 

With vines and flowers that are pendent, such 
as the locust blooms, I use a square frame with 
notches cut in the top, which I can stand up on 
the table, and from which I can hang the flowers ; 
for they should always be shown in the natural 
position in which they grow. 

Photographing wild flowers, growing out of 
doors in their native haunts, is a somewhat dif- 
ferent matter from photographing them indoors 
completely protected from the wind. If it were 
not for the fact that the slightest breath of air, 
almost imperceptible to us, will cause a growing 


Photographing Wild Flowers 259 


flower to move, especially those that have long, 
slender stems, and that it is seldom possible to 
find a day when there is not some breeze stirring, 
then the photographing of the wild flowers in 


White Violets. 


their haunts would be comparatively easy, for 
they naturally compose themselves into artistic 
groupings. But, if one wishes to discover for 
himself what difficulties confront him, let him 
watch a bunch of anemones on what seems to 
him to be an absolutely still day. Although he 


260 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


can feel no breath of air, still he will see that the 
flower-heads on their slender stems keep up a 
constant motion, and are seldom still for a second 
at atime. I once was forced to wait for over an 
hour, when trying to get the photograph of a 
group of seeded dandelion heads, before they all 
remained quiet enough for the three seconds’ 
exposure that was necessary, and there was not 
enough air stirring to evaporate the perspiration 
that continually gathered on my forehead, or to 
give me one instant of relief from the intense 
heat. 

This difficulty, happily, does not extend to all 
plants, as there are some, such as the skunk 
cabbage, that can be photographed even when 
there is considerable breeze blowing. 

If the breeze is slight, the more delicate flow- 
ers may be protected from it, during the expos- 
ure, by means of a cloth screen stretched about 
them, but it must be so placed as not to show 
in the picture for what it is. 

The value of pictures of growing flowers lies 
principally in showing their manner of growth 
and environments. In every case the whole 
plant should be shown, and we should select 
typical specimens, and ones that are growing 
under normal conditions. A skunk cabbage, for 
instance, is a plant of the low, swampy woods, 
but I have found it growing, occasionally, in dry, 


Photographing Wild Flowers 261 


open places. It should be photographed, how- 
ever, in the former situation, for that is its natural 
habitat. Nearly all plants frequently stray from 
their natural locations, but these wanderers are 
not the ones that should be chosen as subjects. 

The isochromatic plate is here again a neces- 
sity, of course, but in this work the fast one will 
be found to be the best 
one to use, as it gives 
us more speed, and 
speed is a great ob- 
ject in out-door flower 
photography. When 
possible, the use of the 
color screen is advan- 
tageous, but this in- 
creases the length of 
exposure to such an 
extent that I would 
not advise any one to 
attempt it except upon 
a very still day; for nothing is more exasperating 
than to feel a breath of air steal up and watch it 
sway your subjects about just in the midst of an 
exposure, and realize that the plate is irretrievably 
ruined and that you might as well take it out and 
try another one. When the day is still enough 
to allow the use of the slow plates, so much the 
better, for they will give the best results. 


Young Skunk Cabbage. 


262 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


The long-focus camera with a lens of a good 
focal length must be used, and the short tripod, 
spoken of in the chapter on photographing nests, 
is a very convenient accessory for photographing 
the flowers that grow close to the ground, for it 
is not well to look directly downward upon them. 
In this work the swing- 
back is a very neces- 
sary adjunct to the 
camera, for by its use 
much of the fore- 
ground and_ back- 
ground can be brought 
into clearer focus, espe- 
cially when the camera 
is tilted downward, 
which will be necessary 
in most cases. Any 
grasses or leaves that 
obtrude between the 
flowers and the camera should be removed, but 
the plant that is to be photographed should never 
be touched ; for the value of the picture lies in the 
fact that it is an exact representation of the plant 
as it grows, and to change its position in any way 
would be liable to spoil this truthfulness. 

The focussing should be done on the flower 
or flowers of the group that are nearest to the 
camera, and the rest brought into sharp focus, 


Trailing Arbutus. 


Photographing Wild Flowers 263 


after doing this as much as possible by the use 
of the swing-back, by stopping down the lens. 
It will sometimes be found necessary to stop it 
down, nearly if not quite to its smallest opening. 
This, of course, will necessitate a long exposure, 


Common Furple Violets. 


and we must take our chances that the wind will 
not move the flowers during it, for every flower 
of the group should always be in perfectly sharp 
focus, and also as much of the surroundings as 
it is possible to have. It can readily be seen 
that a day upon which there is any wind is a 
poor one for this work, and those flowers whose 


264 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


growth is not particularly sturdy, had best not be 
attempted except on an absolutely calm day. 

Flowers should never be photographed in the 
bright sunlight, for the glaring light of the sun 
causes too contrasty a picture with a consequent 
loss of much of the delicate detail that helps to 
make it beautiful. If they are not already grow- 
ing in the shade, then they must be shaded dur- 
ing the exposure, and care must be taken that 
this shade extends over the entire field covered 
by the lens; otherwise, with a normal exposure 
for the shaded parts, that part not shaded will 
be overexposed. 

Never attempt to make the image so big that 
it will occupy too much of the plate. It must 
be large enough to show distinctly in detail, 
but small enough to allow its surroundings to 
show plainly and sufficiently for one to tell at a 
glance in just what kind of a situation it was 
growing. If you attempt to photograph it life 
size, unless the flower is a very small one, you 
will find that the image will not only be consid- 
erably distorted, owing to the foreshortened view 
which you must take of the plant, but that it will 
be almost impossible to get any of the back- 
ground or surroundings in focus, and, conse- 
quently, much of the value and beauty of your 
picture will be lost. 

In this line of work there are many chances for 


Photographing Wild Flowers 265 


beautiful effects. A field of blue flag makes a 
picture that may always be admired, as does also 
a field or group of wild carrots or daisies. Ferns 
are most excellent subjects, and, from the softness 
and grace of their outline and the masses in which 


Bank of Christmas Ferns. 


they grow, they lend themselves most admirably 
to the making of artistic pictures. 

The flower photographer who would make a 
really beautiful and valuable collection of nega- 
tives cannot afford to pass by anything, not even 
the meanest and lowliest of the “ weeds.” I have 
photographed flowers on the edges of roadways, 
where I had first to shake the dust from them, 


266 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


because it happened to be the best group of that 
flower which I had seen. I have photographed 
them in swamps, standing to my knees in water. 
I have photographed them in ponds and creeks, 
where I had to do my focussing from a boat and 
stand my tripod in the water, lengthening the 
legs so that they could reach bottom. I have 
photographed them in the deepest, darkest woods, 


Indian Pipes. 


in fields, salt marshes, dry woodlands, in fact 
everywhere; but I have never yet passed by a 
flower because of its insignificance, and I have 
found that some of those that appeared, at first 
sight, to have very few artistic possibilities, made 
some of the best pictures. 

If we are working to get together a collection 
of flower negatives that will have value, we should 
photograph everything in plant life,and not only 


Photographing Wild Flowers 267 


singly, but in groups. We should photograph the 
flowers that grow in colonies, showing them thus; 
and we should photograph individual specimens 
at different times, showing the manner of their 
growth and condition at the various stages. 

All of these things are of interest and scientific 
value, and we should never consider time wasted 
that is spent in obtaining the best possible results 
along these lines. 


CHARTER XV 


PHOTOGRAPHING TREES, FUNGI, ETC. 


Tue photography of trees is a delightful pas- 
time and can be accomplished along much the 
same lines as flower photography; in fact, the two 
pursuits are almost inseparable, and may be 
worked together with ease and to our advantage, 
for they intermingle. Some of the most beautiful 
flowers grow upon trees, and, in order to show 
them in their natural position, obviously the tree 
must be taken into consideration; and so the 
photographing of trees must be closely connected 
with outdoor flower work. 

There is much to be gained by a study of tree 
forms, and more especially twig and branch forms, 
in connection with their decorative value. There 
is more that can be done in the way of decora- 
tive photography with a blossom-covered branch, 
if we know how to use it, than with any other one 
thing, and even the bare branches themselves 
must not be despised, for they have much of beauty 
in them. 

Many photographers complain that in the winter 
there is nothing that can be done along their lines, 
but it need not be so with the photographer who 

268 


Photographing Trees, Fungi, etc. 269 


White Birch in Winter. 


realizes the beauty and individuality of the trees 
and shrubs in their leafless condition, and I am 
not alone in the opinion that the winter garb of 
the trees is by far the most interesting. 


270 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


A most instructive series of photographs can be 
made by photographing the tree, not only in its 
summer and winter garb, and this proves more 
interesting when done with the same tree, but 
also its trunk at 
close ham ce 
showing detail 
of the bark, and 
the leaf-buds, 
flowers, fruit, and 
leaves, as nearly 
life size as possi- 
ble. These latter 
should be done 
indoors and more 
properly come 
under the head 
of the preceding 
chapter than this. 

In photograph- 
Inge thewentire 
tree, either in 
summer or winter, we should always select one 
that is entirely typical and well branched, not one 
that is in any way misshapen, unless this is done 
for some particular purpose. Also, it should be a 
tree that stands well out from its fellows, so that 
it may show in the photograph without any 
detracting features. 


Trunk of Red Cedar. 


Photographing Trees, Fungi, etc. me 


In summer-tree photography, the main trouble 
is again, as with the flowers, the wind; for when 
one can feel not the slightest zephyr from his 
station on the ground there seems to be always 
enough air stirring in the upper currents to cause 
the topmost twigs and branches to sway. It is 
worth while noting that after a sharp blow of two 
or three minutes’ duration there is almost always 
a lull, and, if we are on the constant lookout, we 
may catch the tree, during this small period, when 
the leaves are sufficiently still for the short time 
necessary for the exposure. 

This question of exposure is again entirely de- 
pendent upon many things, principally the light; 
but usually, with a near-by tree, a quarter of a 
second is amply sufficient unless we are using 
the ray filter, which is never necessary in this 
work. Of course, we will be forced on occasions 
to stop down our lens somewhat, in order to get 
the whole tree in sharp focus, and we naturally 
must take this into consideration when judging 
the length of exposure to be given. Certainly it 
is always best to have an accurately timed expos- 
ure; but here, as with the flowers, it is better to 
err on the side of over than under exposure. 

The work should be done either in the early 
morning or late afternoon, never in the middle of 
the day, for the sun directly overhead gives a very 
poor light for this work. We must remember 


272 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


that, in order to get all the detail in the foliage 
that is possible, the light must be falling dzrectly 
znto it, not striking it from the side; and, also, 
that a photograph taken directly against the source 


Locust Blossoms. 


of light shows nothing of the soliage but a mass 
of black, no matter what length of exposure may 
be given in the attempt to overcome this. So we 
must always have the sun at our back in order to 
obtain good results, and the nearer it is to the 
horizon the better, for then there is little chance 


Photographing Trees, Fungi, etc. 273 


of any deep masses of shadow in the foliage. 
The very best pictures of trees can be obtained 
on days when the sun is slightly obscured, and 
should there be light clouds in the sky it is 
always best to wait until one crosses the sun 
before making the exposure. The light then is 
sufficiently intense for all purposes and it will 
give no hard contrasts. 

We must use the non-halation plate, for that is 
the only one that will reproduce perfectly the deli- 
cate outline of the upper branches and prevent the 
blurring of halation, caused by the bright back- 
ground of sky, which is always a disagreeable 
feature of this kind of a negative made on the 
ordinary plate. If we had rather do it, we can 
“back” an ordinary plate which gives it the non- 
halation properties. This consists in painting the 
back of the plate with a preparation that is sold by 
all photographic dealers. This “backing” must, 
of course, be done in the dark room and washed 
off again, before development, in clean water. 
Care must be exercised, when putting it on, not 
to allow it to run over the edges of the plate on to 
the film side. Many people prefer these backed 
plates to the regular non-halation, but they are 
considerable trouble, and I cannot see that they 
give any better results. 

It is important, however, that we use one of 
these two plates, as one can soon discover for 

T 


274 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


himself if he will make two negatives of the 
same tree, one on the ordinary plate without 
the “backing” and the other on the non-halation 


Spruce Cones. 


or the backed plate. If we use the plate combin- 
ing the qualities of non-halation with those of 
orthochromatism, we will obtain the best possible 
results, 


Photographing Trees, Fungi, etc. 275 


The camera should be the long-focus type with 
both the rising and falling front and the swing- 
back. We will find both of these adjuncts neces- 
sary, in order to get the full image of the tree on 
the plate and to keep that image from having the 
appearance of falling over, which will happen when 
the camera is tilted upward without the compen- 
sating aid of the swing-back. 

As for the lens, the one we use for flower 
work will answer every purpose, although the 
best results can probably be obtained by the use 
of a wide angle, as this lens will give more promi- 
nence to the main object, and allow the rest of 
the background to diminish in size and impor- 
tance without being too much out of focus. 

Naturally, a large camera is best for this work, 
and I should advise nothing smaller than a six 
and a half by eight and a half, and an eight by 
ten is even better. The smaller sizes show the 
detail so very minute, that the pictures made by 
them are of very little value either pictorially or 
scientifically. 

In photographing the flowers, fruit, leaves, etc., 
the work is, of course, similar to that with the cut 
flowers, and so the directions given in the last 
chapter can be followed here. In photographing 
the trunk we should get near enough to it to show 
clearly the detail of the bark, but not so near as 
to entirely exclude the first branches of the tree. 


276 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


Blossoms of American Chestnut. 


No patches of sunshine should fall through the 
foliage upon the trunk, for this gives a very dis- 
agreeable spotty appearance to the picture, 


Photographing Trees, Fungi, etc. 27 


In photographing the fungi we come to the 
easiest branch of all nature work, and, for that 
very reason, the most satisfactory so far as results 
are concerned ; for, if we do not get a good nega- 
tive with every exposure, then it is our own fault. 

There is a great diversity of form in the Fungi 
family, from the mould on our bread and cheese 
to the large “ toadstools,” some of them over a foot 
in breadth. In this family, however, are many 
members whose forms, markings, and coloring are 
exceedingly striking and beautiful, and exquisite 
photographs can be made of them with a little care. 

The Clavarias, or coral fungi, make most excel- 
lent subjects from a point of beauty, as do also 
many of the genus Pleurotus, and there are great 
numbers of others, notably the Amanitas, whose 
beauty must not, nor can it be, overlooked. The 
hunt for the different species is most enjoyable, 
taking one, as it does, to those parts of the woods 
that would never be visited by him otherwise, for 
many of them grow in grewsome places. From 
this fact the “toadstools,” as the larger growths 
are commonly called, have long been considered 
as a kind of uncanny growth, all of them poison- 
ous except the species ordinarily used as an article 
of food and which, by most people, is the only one 
giventhename of “mushroom.” In point of fact this 
distinction between the “mushrooms” and “ toad- 
stools” has no scientific basis. They are all one 


278 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


or the other as you like, and many of the so-called 
“toadstools” are not only edible, but much more 
delicious in taste than the ones ordinarily eaten. It 
is better, however, that any one not well acquainted 
with them should stick to the well-known species 


Mushrooms. 


Photographed as growing. 


when gathering them for the table, for many of 
them do secrete a virulent poison, and it 1s dan- 
gerous to experiment with them. 

Fungi grow not only in the ‘grewsome, dank 
woods, however, but are to be found everywhere; 
and the mushroom hunter must look for them in 
every imaginable locality. Moreover, if we would 


Photographing Trees, Fungi, etc. 279 


make a good series of their photographs, we must 
be constantly on the outlook for them, for they 
are extremely short-lived, some even springing up, 
attaining their full growth, and sinking down into 
a mass of decay, all in the course of a few hours. 

The early morning is the best time to look for 
them, for then they are in the most perfect condi- 
tion and, if picked, will remain fresh for some 
time. If we wish to carry them home with us 
in order to photograph them indoors, this may 
be done; but they must be removed with a goodly 
quantity of the earth which surrounds them, or 
the bark of the tree, or whatever other substance 
they may be attached to, so that the true nature 
of their growth and surroundings may be ac- 
curately shown. It is not at all necessary or 
advisable, however, to remove them from their 
natural situation, for they are not easily affected 
by the wind, and exposures of any length of time 
may be made upon them, as they stand, without 
any danger of their moving. 

The orthochromatic plate should be used, and, 
with the more highly colored ones, it is well also 
to use the color screen. The short tripod is 
necessary, Or we can sometimes get even better 
results by placing the camera flat on the ground; 
but, in doing this, care must naturally be used 
not to move it after the focus has been made. 

It is sometimes a good idea to lay one of the 


280 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


mushrooms of the group we are photographing 
flat on the ground, as if it had fallen over, so 
that its under side may be shown, for it is the 
gills of a mushroom that often aid materially in 
its identification, and so it is better, when possible, 
to have them show distinctly. 

Some object, such as an acorn, a leaf, or anything 
of the sort that would naturally be found on the 
ground, should be placed by the side of them, so 
as to give some accurate idea of their size. 

If we are going into the purely scientific side 
of this branch of photography, then we should 
also make sectional views of them, in order to show 
the inner construction and the manner in which 
the gills are attached to the cap; but I do not think 
that many of my readers will care to do this. 

As in the outdoor photography of flowers, the 
image of the mushroom, or whatever variety of 
fungi you are photographing, should not be made 
so large that its surroundings will not show clearly, 
for it is important that the picture should show 
the nature of the situation in which the specimen 
was found. 

Above all, learn your fungi before you photo- 
graph them; for a picture of a mushroom will not 
alone determine its species and it is important 
that you should know each species that you 
photograph and label the picture correctly, other- 
wise it will have no scientific value, 


Clabave Iai Oil 
PHOTOGRAPHING IN THE ZOOS 


Wuite the photographing of wild animals in 
captivity cannot be compared to photograph- 
ing the same animals in their native haunts so 
far as pleasure and excitement are concerned, 
still there is no better place to work for obtain- 
ing really excellent pictures of the animals or 
birds themselves than in a modern, up-to-date 
zoological garden. It is a good place to learn 
how to photograph the wild things, and I should 
advise a beginner to first try his hand on the 
inmates of some Zoo before starting out to do 
work in the field. By so doing he will learn 
many things that will be of immense service to 
him, and even the small Zoo in Central Park is 
a good place to commence to learn these things. 
It must not be imagined, however, that all is plain 
sailing even in the Zoos, for if you set out with 
the idea that you can snap right and left and 
get a picture at every snap, you will be most 
wofully disappointed. 

The Bronx Zoélogical Park in New York and 
the Washington National Zoo are two ideal 


281 


282 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


places for obtaining most excellent pictures, and 
yet even in these places the difficulties are many. 

If one does not object to having the bars of 
the cage or fence showing between his subject 
and himself, then things are comparatively plain 
sailing; but to obtain really first-class pictures 
that will show the animal in characteristic at- 
titudes without the introduction of any disturb- 
ing features that prove it to be in captivity, is 
not so easy, as any one will soon learn when he 
tries it. 

One of the great difficulties is that the animals 
are usually too tame and, either from curiosity or 
a wish to make friends with you, will come close 
to the bars the instant you approach and will 
stay there no matter how much you attempt to 
drive them away. I remember once trying to 
obtain the photograph of the head only of a 
full-grown lion cub in the Bronx Zoo, which I 
wished for a particular purpose. There were 
four of them in the cage, and as I approached 
they were all lying down, two at just the right 
distance from the bars to enable me to get the 
picture the exact size I wanted. As I came up 
to the cage, however, and prepared to make an 
exposure, they all jumped to their feet and 
crowded close to the bars of the cage where I 
stood. I think this was actuated both by curi- 
osity and friendship, for they tried to make me 


‘uo Jo peeH 


283 


the Zoos 


ing in 


Photograph 


284 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


play with them and at the same time they seemed 
to be somewhat in doubt about the camera. It 
took me over an hour to get any one of them 
to move far enough away from the bars to enable 
me to make the shot that I wanted,and that was 
the only one that I obtained. Luckily it turned 
out fairly well, so I was not disappointed. 

The wolves, too, acted in much the same man- 
ner, insisting on having their heads scratched or 
sticking their noses through the bars to lick my 
hand. Going inside the cage does not mend 
matters much, as they crowd around so closely 
as to make it impossible to do anything. 

The animals that are more wild are easier sub- 
jects, for, even though they may refuse to come 
near enough for you to use an ordinary lens, still 
fine pictures may be obtained with the telephoto, 
and even if the ordinary lens is used and the 
resulting image very small it can always be en- 
larged, provided it is sharp enough in detail. 
But the animals that insist on coming close to 
the bars to be petted, and especially those that 
try to examine the camera by sticking their paws 
through the bars and making dabs at it, are the 
ones that try your patience. 

The use of a tripod camera in the Zoos is sel- 
dom necessary, except when using a telephoto 
lens, and is most disheartening ; and I should never 
advise its use. With the reflex or the twin lens 


Photographing in the Zoos 285 


very excellent results can be obtained, and even 
with a kodak, provided the lens is a fast one, 
some good work may be done. 

Most of my work in the Zoos has been done with 
a five by seven reflex camera, fitted witha very fast 
lens made to cover an eight by ten plate. By the 
use of so large a lens I obtain greater illumination 
and greater length of focus, allowing me to obtain 
larger images of my subjects than I could with 
a shorter focus lens. With this outfit I have 
taken pictures practically indoors with the tenth 
of a second exposure, that, while being some- 
what underexposed, were, by careful development, 
made into good printing negatives. Of course 
when working in the bright sunlight such a rapid 
lens is unnecessary, but it can always be stopped 
down and will then give greater definition and 
depth of field. Moreover, in work in the Zoos 
one can never tell under what conditions of light- 
ing he will be forced to take his pictures, and it is 
always well to be supplied with a lens that will 
allow you the maximum speed of exposure. 

The three most essential points to be con- 
sidered are: first, the pose of the animal, one 
characteristic of the species being of the most im- 
portance; second, the surroundings, which should 
always be natural and with no disturbing element, 
such as a fence or other sign of civilization, in the 
picture, if this can be avoided; and third, the 


286 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


light. This is of considerable importance, for the 
careful distribution of light and shade means much 
to the success of the picture. Very strong sunlight 
should usually be avoided, especially with very 
light-colored subjects. White birds or animals are 
best photographed against the light, or at least in a 


Snowy Herons. 


very much diffused light, for in the direct rays of 
the sun much of the delicate details of their plu- 
mage is lost, and often they will even reflect the 
light to such an extent as to cause halation on the 
plate anda consequent poor negative. Dark birds 
or animals naturally require all the light directly 
upon them that is possible. So it is always well, if 
we would obtain really excellent results, to care- 


Photographing in the Zoos 287 


fully study all the details. One can usually take 
his time when photographing the wild things in 
captivity, and so we can afford to be much more 
careful in our selection of pose, surroundings, and 
lighting than when working in the open. So it is 
that for really good pictures of the animals them- 
selves there is no place where better work can be 
done than in the Zoos. 

Should we find it impossible to eliminate all the 
disturbing elements from the picture, we can often 
get rid of them by careful manipulation of the 
negatives after development. The knowledge 
of how to do this most effectively will come as 
we become better acquainted with the different 
processes of photography. If no other method 
will serve to do this properly, we can always gain 
our end by double printing, which consists of 
blocking out the main object on the original plate 
and printing it with the background from another 
negative. This often gives very pleasing results, 
but is rather a delicate process and must be done 
carefully in order to keep the correct propor- 
tion of things and to avoid having the animal over- 
lap the background or vwzce versa. 

The bars of the fence or cage which are between 
you and your subject need never bea serious men- 
ace, aS you can always hold your camera close 
enough to them with the lens pointing between 
them to keep them from showing in the picture. 


288 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


Work on domestic animals, too, is not without 
its full quota of pleasure and interest as well as 
benefit. It is remarkable how few really good 


Head of White-tailed Deer. 


pictures of our domestic animals there are obtain- 
able, as I have had occasion to find out. One is 
apt to think this work too easy, but let me assure 
you that it is not quite so easy as it would seem, 
and a good series of pictures of our cattle, horses, 


Photographing in the Zoos 289 


sheep, dogs, cats, chickens, etc., would be a valu- 
able addition to any one’s collection of pictures of 
animal life. 

One cannot always afford the time to take long 
trips afield after the wild animals, but there is 
always time for one to spend a day now and then 
among the dumb inhabitants of a farm or in a 
zoological park, and should he work carefully, 
with patience and some forethought, he can obtain 
long series of not only entertaining and beautiful 
but really valuable pictures. 

Cats and kittens make most delightful subjects, 
for their attitudes are innumerable and in every one 
they are interesting. Dogs also make interesting 
subjects, and are not always easy to photograph, 
for they are so constantly on the move that it is 
often difficult to snap them. Here again the reflex 
camera is invaluable, for it is almost impossible to 
do any good work on these animals with a tripod 
outfit. 

One never realizes what remarkable and as- 
tonishing positions the feet of a horse, in full 
trotting or running action, assume, until he has 
seen a picture of one taken under such conditions. 
To take such a photograph, naturally, necessitates 
the use of the strongest light, the fastest plate, 
and the quickest shutter, for, with a horse at full 
speed, an exposure of z,j59 part of a second is 
necessary in order to entirely stop motion, or, in 

U 


290 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


other words, that the image may not be blurred. 
So here the reflex is an absolute necessity. These 
negatives must be treated for under exposure, as 
such they will undoubtedly be, and may even re- 
quire intensification afterward; but if carefully 


White Pelican. 


developed, in a stand bath, they can be made of 
excellent printing quality and make exceedingly 
interesting studies. 

Cows, swine, the domestic fowl, donkeys and 
mules, and the gentle sheep, all make excellent 
subjects for the naturalist photographer, although 


Photographing in the Zoos 291 


I regret to say that the last have already been 
somewhat overdone in the so-called “ pictorial ” 
efforts which are foisted upon an unsuspecting 
and overgenerous public by some of our “artist 
photographers.” Good photographs of them are, 
however, not so common. 

I have made this chapter a comparatively short 
one, for many of my readers may think that it 
does not rightly belong in a book which treats 
of the photography of nature. Their idea is an 
entirely erroneous one, however, for a photograph 
of any animal, whether it be wild or tame, show- 
ing it in any natural and characteristic attitude, is 
of value, and our familiarity with the subjects 
should not lead us into contempt for them from a 
photographic standpoint. I am, if anything, a 
nature photographer, doing that to the almost 
exclusion of other work, and yet I do not consider 
it beneath my dignity to photograph the domestic 
animals, and I can find great pleasure and profit 
from a day spent with my camera in the Zoo. If 
many of the men who would enter nature work 
would first try themselves out, so to speak, on the 
animals that are comparatively easy to photograph, 
they would find themselves better fitted for the 
work which they have before them. 


CHAPTER XVII 


PHOTOGRAPHY IN CAMP AND WOODS 


Trophies. 
Photograph by F. M. Hale. 


For the sportsman who 
wishes to take a camera into 
the woods with him for the 
purpose of obtaining simply 
pleasing records, in the way 
of photographs, of the camp 
life and incidents of the 
chase, I will say a few words. 

There is much that can be 
done in the woods with a 
camera, many pictures of 
both beauty and interest that 
can be taken, by any one 
who does not care to spend 
the time, patience, and energy 
necessary to the photograph- 
ing of the wild life. A series 
of pictures of the life in the 


camp and on the trail, of the quarry taken and the 
manner of taking it, are easy to obtain and prove 
most interesting trophies, and which can be 
looked at again and again with much pleasure 


202 


Photography in Camp and Woods — 293 


both to yourself and your friends during the long ° 
days between times when you must live over in 
retrospection the pleasures of the days and nights 
spent in the woods. 


Hitting the Trail. 
Photograph by S. D. Dixon. 


Moreover, the apparatus necessary to obtain 
these pictures need not be either extensive or ex- 
pensive, and the knowledge required is merely 
that of knowing how to use your camera. 

The style and size of the camera to be used 
must depend entirely upon the desires of the 


294 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


sportsman. I should advise the use of one not 
larger than four by five, as this size is more easily 
handled, is much lighter, and takes up less room 
in the pack than any larger size and, what is often 
well to take into consideration, is much less costly, 
both in the original expense and in the making of 
the pictures. A four by five makes a most con- 
venient size of picture for keeping in an album, 
and should you wish to have any particular pic- 
ture somewhat larger for framing or other purpose, 
it can very easily be enlarged to any desired size 
with no loss of detail or beauty, provided the orig- 
inal is properly taken. On the other hand, I 
should not advise the use of anything smaller 
than this, for the resulting pictures are so very 
small if, for instance, one of the smaller pocket 
kodaks is used, that, while it is all sharp and clear, 
the detail is so minute as to require a magnifying 
glass to properly see the picture, and when it is 
enlarged to a respectable size it is apt to be more 
or less fuzzy and indistinct. 

While for work on animals or birds, flowers, 
etc, I always, invariably, advocate the use of 
plates, in this kind of photography I think that 
films are just as good, —if not, indeed, preferable. 
They have the advantages over plates of being 
less bulky, much lighter, not breakable, and much 
more easily handled, and, when the roll films or the 
film pack are used, they require no dark room for 


Photography in Camp and Woods 295 


their insertion in the camera or removal there- 
from. Moreover, since the advent of the non- 
curling, orthochromatic films, about the only 
thing that can be said against them is that 
they have not quite the fineness of grain of a 
plate; but for ordinary work they are, in every 
respect, the equal of a plate except that they 
are somewhat more expensive. 

Of course, if one wishes to spend the amount 
necessary, I should advise the use of a tripod 
camera with a high-grade lens. The lens need 
not be one of the very fastest; indeed, this is not 
advisable, for here depth of field is preferable to 
great speed and therefore a lens working at about 
F.6.5 is plenty fast enough. If you do not care 
to make much of an outlay on your outfit, then 
there is no better camera made for this pur- 
pose than one of the four by five folding kodaks 
made by the Eastman Company. It can be used 
either on a tripod, or other stationary stand, for 
time exposures or in the hand for snap shots, and 
while it cannot be used to photograph objects 
nearer than about six feet, still this is no serious 
drawback, as it is seldom that one will care to 
make so large an image of anything. The lens 
that is sold with the camera is a good one for 
ordinary work, though, if we should wish for 
one with greater speed, any make can be fitted 
to it. 


296 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


A Temporary Shack. 
Photograph by S, D. Dixon. 


Photography in Camp and Woods 297 


It is well, if we are to depend upon the focus- 
sing scale on these cameras, to test that scale when 
we first buy one in order to be sure that it registers 


correctly, else 
we may find all 
our results out 
of focus and 
fuzzy. This 
can be readily 
ascertained by 
focussing upon 
a piece of white 
paper, with 
heavy black 
letters printed 
upon it at the 
different  dis- 
tances, as 
marked upon 
the scale, and 
noting if the 
distance at 
which a sharp 


Whipping a Mountain Stream. 
Photograph by S. D. Dixon. 


image is obtained corresponds to the figures upon 
the scale. These scales are usually carefully tested 
before leaving the factory, but occasionally one 
is found that has been put on carelessly and is, 
in consequence, out of register. Also, if we are 
intending to rely to any extent upon the view 


298 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


finder, we must be sure that it shows the view 
exactly as it will appear in the negative. This 
can be determined by making an exposure and, 
after development, comparing it with the view 
as it appears in the finder from exactly the same 
point from which the negative was taken. By 
these simple preliminary precautions much future 
annoyance may be avoided. 

If only one camera is to be used, the reflex of 
course is out of the question; for much of the work 
will necessarily be done in the shade of the deeper 
woods, where an instantaneous exposure is imprac- 
ticable and, therefore, the reflex would be useless. 

Successful photography in the woods is not 
entirely an easy matter, as the play of light and 
shadow makes exposures uncertain. This matter 
of exposure is one that it is extremely difficult to 
give any definite advice about, as it so entirely 
depends upon the varying conditions of light. 
There are many exposure metres upon the market 
designed to aid the photographer in this respect, 
but none of them that I know of are infallible. 
In a little book, published by the Eastman Com- 
pany, Mr. Frank M. Steadman describes a system 
by which exposures may be simply approximated 
with considerable exactness under almost any 
ordinary circumstances. While this system has 
been received with some ridicule, it is still most 
excellent for any ordinary landscape, view, or 


Photography in Camp and Woods 299 


interior work, and if the beginner would learn 
and follow it, he would avoid many failures that 
are bound to occur when he depends entirely 
upon his own judgment in the matter of exposures. 

One thing we must remember in wood photog- 
raphy: always expose for the deeper shadows 
and let the high lights 
take care of them- 
selves. By this I mean 
give enough exposure 
to bring out the detail 
in the places that are 
ihe “most deeply 
shaded, and if those 
parts that are in the 
strongest light prove 
to be overexposed, the 
negative must be doc- 
tored either during or 
after development. Oe eee er 

Light aa the arenes Photograph by F. M. Hale. 
is often deceptive, appearing to be much stronger 
than it really is, so if you are not certain of the 
length of exposure that should be given, it is a 
good rule to always give a little more than you 
think to be right, for an overexposed plate, if 
properly treated in development, gives a much 
better negative than one that is underexposed. 

But, after all is said and done, the best advice 


300 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


that can be given is: learn to know your lens 
under all conditions and then you will make but 
few errors, and this can only be accomplished by 
repeatedly experimenting with it. 

Of course it must always be remembered that 
the length of exposure increases in accordance 


Bringing in the Quarry. 


Photograph by F. M. Hale. 


with the diminishing in the size of the stop used 
in the lens, and there are few lenses that can be 
used at anything but the largest aperture for an 
instantaneous exposure. And, by the way, never 
try to take a snap shot in the shadow of the 
woods, for the result will be worthless from under 
exposure unless you are using one of the very 
fastest lenses. 


Photography in Camp and Woods — 301 


Gray-day pictures often give pleasing results, 
and sometimes the light, in the open, on a cloudy 
day, is sufficiently strong for rapid work. In the 
shadow of the woods, however, on such a day the 


q 
IF 


A Fair Shot. 
Photograph by F. M. Hale. 


light is apt to be very dull, and if we attempt to 
do any work under such conditions, exposures of 
at least two or three seconds must be given. It 
is best, however, to do such work on a bright day, 
as the play of light and shadow often proves to 
be one of the chief beauties in a woodland scene. 


302 Photography for the Sportsman Naturalist 


If a portion of sky is included in a picture, 
always remember that the beauty of that picture 
will be greatly enhanced if we wait for an oppor- 
tunity to get some clouds in the sky, for a glaring 
white sky invariably spoils what might otherwise 
be a very pleasing effect. 

Many otherwise good woodland views are often 
marred, if not entirely ruined, by improper 
lighting. It is the generally preconceived idea of 
most beginners that the sun should be shining 
directly in the direction that the picture is taken 
and that the angle of the sun’s rays and the point 
of sight through the lens should be, at the most, 
but a few degrees apart. As a matter of fact this 
is all entirely wrong, and the pictures thus ob- 
tained are never so satisfactory as they might be. 

Depth of prospective is best shown through the 
medium of shading, and this is best obtained by 
so placing the camera as to bring the sun from 
forty-five to sixty degrees from the point of sight. 
This causes the shadows of the trees to fall at 
right angles to or slightly pointing toward the 
camera and gives a realistic charm to the picture 
that can be obtained in no other way. Of course, 
the middle of the day is a bad time for forest 
photography, for, the sun being directly overhead, 
the lighting is exceedingly flat. Early morning 
or late afternoon, when the shadows are long, is 
the best time. 


Photography in Camp and Woods — 303 


Most pleasing pictures can frequently be made 
directly against the sun, but in doing this one 
must be careful that the sun’s direct rays do not 
enter the lens. 

One cannot be too careful in selecting the point 
of view for a scene of any kind, and it is here that 
one’s artistic ability shows itself. There is a pic- 
ture in every scene if we but know how to find 
it, and whether we make good or bad pictures 
depends entirely upon our artistic judgment. 


INDEX 


Acetone sulphite, 53. 
Agfa intensifier, 61. 
Amanitas, genus of fungi, 277. 


Angle of view of lens, see Lens. 


Anglewings, 204, 205. 
Apparatus for field work — 
Ball and socket clamp, 91. 
Camera, 85-86. 
Camera stand, 91. 
Changing bag, 89. 
Color screen, 100. 
Cut film, 100, 101. 
Developing tent, 96, 97. 
Focussing work, 94, 95. 


General suggestions, $1-85. 


Lens, 91-93. 

Minor accessories, 94-96. 
Plates, 98-100, 101. 
Quantity and weight, 85. 
Ray filter, 100. 

Shutters, 93-94. 
Sundries, 97-98. 

Tripod, go. 


Aquatic life, photographing of, see 
Fish and other forms of 


aquatic life. 
Artificial tree trunks, 171, 173. 


Background of picture, 64, 65. 


Backus, W. H., quoted as to rattle- 


snake 
camera, 232-235. 


hunting 


x 


with 


305 


Bath, acid, 53. 


Hypo, 52, 53- 


Beaver, 137. 
Birds and young, photographing — 


As a pursuit, 160-162. 

Best time for, 162-164. 

By means of decoys, 182-184. 

By means of flash-light, 187. 

By use of artificial tree trunk, 
171, 173. 

By use of bait, 184-186. 

Effect of fear of man, 164-167. 

Nesting site, change of, 175-177. 

Obstacles to success, 166-169. 

Old birds, 181, 182, 186, 187, 188. 

Quickness always essential, 188. 

Scientific value of, 162. 

When young are ready to leave 
nest, 177-150, 

With young birds in nest, 170, 
171, 173-175. 


Birds’ nests, photographing — 


Arrangement of 
140-141. 

Artistic possibilities, 138-139. 

“ Cave-dwellers’” nests, 157, 158. 

Cliff breeders’ nests, 158. 

Exposure, suggestions concern- 
ing, 144. 

Ground-builders’ nests, 142-146. 

Ideal day for, 145. 

In situ, 139. 


surroundings, 


306 


Birds’ nests, photographing [con- 
tinued | — 
Mirror, use of, 145, 146. 
Near the ground — 
Focussing, 148. 
Lighting and arrangement, 
147, 148-151. 
Outfit for, 141-142. 
Placing of camera, 146, 147. 
Position of nest, 139-140. 
Preservation of nests, 159. 
Sandpiper’s nest, 142. 
Size of image, I51. 
Tree-builders’ nests — 
Opening of, 156. 
Preliminary 
151-154. 
Removal from site, 154-156. 
Telephoto lens, use of, 154. 
Blistering, see Bath. 
Box tortoise, 241, 242. 
Bromide of potassium, 58. 
Bronx Zoélogical Park, 281. 
Buffalo, disappearance of, 8. 
Butterflies, 191, 192-193, 196-202, 
204-207. 


arrangements, 


Camera — 

Basic principles, 29. 

Enlarging, 64. 

For photographing cut flowers, 
254. 

For use with telephotographic 
lens, 71. 

Hand, in the woods, 293-295, 
297, 298. 

Long focus, 275. 

“Lying” of, 4. 

Micro-photographic, 190, 191. 

Modern, briefly described, 31. 

“Press the button” type, 32. 


Index 


Camera [continued | — 
Protection of, 122. 
Reflex, 32, 34, 113, 127, 289, 298. 
In insect photography, 202. 
In photographing small mam- 
mals, 135. 
In reptile photography, 236, 


240. 
In photographing flying birds, 
187. 
Selection of, 35. 
Thorough acquaintance with, 


necessary, 35. 
Tripod, 32, 35, 120, 127.. 
Twin lens, description of, 32-34. 
See Nature Photography and 
Photography. 
Camera obscura, invention and de- 
velopment of, 30, 31. 
Camps and woods, photography in — 
Advantages, 293, 294. 
Apparatus, 293-295, 297. 
Light and shadow, 298-303. 
Caribou, 119. 
Carlin, W. E., achievements with a 
camera, 106-107, 128-130. 
Chapman, F. M., quoted as to bird 
photography, 182-184. 
Clavarias, 277. 
Cleanliness as a factor in photog- 
raphy, 51. 
Color photography, 4. 
Color screen, 254, 255. 
Convertible lens, see Lens, modern 
double. 


22 


Copperheads, the, 229. 

Coral fungi, see Clavarias, 

Coral snake, the, 229, 230, 231. 

Corals, see Fish and other forms of 
aquatic life. 

Cuthbert rookery, the, 189. 


Index 


Dark room, the, 49-51. 
Decoys, 182-184. 
Deer, “ flash-light ” pictures of, 116- 
118. 
Securing photographs of, 112, 
113. 
Suggestions as to photographing, 
119-120. 
Developers — 
Formulas for, 55. 
Metol as a, 55, 56. 
Metol and hydrokinone, 57. 
Pyro, 54, 55 
Developing — 
Air bubbles on plate, 52. 
Extent of, 56, 57. 
Handling of plates, 62. 
Intensification, 61. 
Orthochromatic plates, 61, 62. 
Over exposure, 58, 59. 
Reduction of negatives, 59, 60. 
Retardation of, 58. 
Tank method, 59. 
Under exposure, 58, 59. 
Diaphragm, see Lens. 
Domestic animals, photographing of, 
288-291. 
Double exposures, 109, 110. 
Double printing, 65. 
Dugmore, Mr., quoted as to — 
A hunting experience, 108-109. 
Bird-nest photography, 147, 148. 
Changing bag, 89. 
Fish photography, 213-215. 


Enlargements direct from negatives, 
see Negatives. 

Entomology, economic importance 
of, 207. 

Exposure in photographing birds’ 
nests, 144, 145. 


307 


Fear of man on part of birds, 164— 
167. 
Films, 294, 295. 
Fish and other forms of aquatic life, 
photographing — 
Aquarium, 209-211, 213-217. 
Camera for, 211-213, 218-221. 
Catching and handling fish for, 
217, 218, 224. 
Early attempts, 208. 
Good work, essentials of, 208, 
209. 
Jellyfish, 


Recent progress in, 


222-223, 224. 
208-209. 

Thoroughness, 225, 226. 

Flash-light, the, in photographing 
adult birds, 187. 

In photographing deer, 116-119. 
Focal length of a lens, see Lens. 
Focus, universal, see Lens. 
Focussing on near-by objects, 37. 
Formaline, as a plate hardener, 53. 
Frilling, see Bath. 

Front, rising and falling, 37, 275. 
Fungi, 277-280. 


Gibson, W. Hamilton, 7. 
Gopher, 130. 
Great auk, 8. 


Hand camera, see Camera. 
Hare, the little chief, see 
Mountain pika. 
Herons, 7. 
Hydrokinone, 57. 
Hypo, 60. 
Bath, 59. 


Rocky 


Insects, photographing — 
Camera suitable for, 195. 
From dead specimens, 203. 


308 


Insects, photographing [coz’d |] — 
Importance of, 207. 
Indoor work necessary, 195. 
Knowledge of entomology de- 

sirable, 194, 195. 
Need of photographs, 194. 
Rearing of insects, 195, 196. 
Size of insects a hindrance, 190. 
See Butterfly. 
Isochromatic plates, see Plates. 


Kearton brothers, the, 158, 171. 
Kodaks, 294, 295. 


Larger animals, photographing — 
Apparatus for, 114. 
See Apparatus for field work. 
Bears, 121. 
Camera best adapted for, 113. 
Care required, 109, I10, 
Caribou, 119. 
Compared with shooting, 107- 
109. 


Deer, 114, 115, 116, 117, 119-120, | 


With flash-light, 116-119. 
Lenses for, 113, 114. 
Lynx, 115. 
Methods discussed, 110-113. 
Natural attitude, importance of 
securing, 122. 
Notable achievements, 103-107. 
Obstacles to success, 102-103. 
Orthochromatic plates, 121, 122. 
Outfit, protection of, 122. 
Rocky Mountain sheep, 121. 
Watchfulness necessary, 114-116. 
Lens — 
Age, effect of, 45. 
Anastigmatic and 
compared, 43, 44. 
Angle of view, 42. 


rectilinear | 


Index 


Lens [continaed | — 
Care of, 44-46. 
Diaphragms (stops), 40-41. 
Field, depth of, 4o. 
Focal length, 38, 39. 
Focus, depth of, 40. 

Universal, 39. 

Focussing of, 44. 
For nature work, 42-43. 
Functions of, 38. 
Marking systems, 41, 42. 
Modern double, 38. 
More than one desirable, 43. 
Pieces of, 43. 
Principles of, 38. 
Selection of, 42-43, 44. 
Speed of, 41, 42. 
“ Stops” (diaphragms), 40-41. 
Testing of, 46. 
When necessary, 37. 


Marking lenses, see Lens. 

Matteson, Sumner W., 231, 232. 

Metol, as a developer, 55, 56. 

Mice, 136, 137. 

Mirror, use of, in photographing 
birds’ nests, 145, 146, 157. 

Moccasin, the, 229. 

Moles, 136. 

Moths, see Butterflies. 

Mushrooms, see Fungi. 


Nature photography — 
Amateurish methods, 9-11. 
As a means of studying nature. 

4-6. 

Compared with drawing, 12. 
Deceptions attempted, 12. 
Details, accuracy in, 13. 
Difficulties in, 16, 17. 
Effect of, on iliustrating, 3, 4. 


Index 309 


Nature photography [cond] — 
Field for, in other countries, 28. 
In America, 28. 
Focus, sharpness of, 44. 
History of, briefly discussed, 1-3. 
Negatives, chances of success 
with, 17, 18. 
Qualities making for the best 
work, 15, 16. 
Requirements and results, 18. 
Scientific value of, 6-8. 
Scope, 4. 
Serious work necessary, 9. 
Negatives — 
Density of, reduced, 59-61. 
Development, 56, 57. 
Elimination of hypo, 54. 
Enlargement, 64. 
Handling in development, 62. 
Intensifying of, 61. 
Keeping of large collection, 67, 
68. 
Local manipulation, 61. 
Metol-developed, characteristics 
of, 56. 
Metol - hydrokinone - developed, 
57, 58. 
Practical results in use of, 18. 
Retouching of, 66. 
Washing of, 54. 
See Developing. 
Niepce, quoted as to his first picture 
with a camera, 29. 
Non-halation plate, see Plate. 


Opaque, 64. 
Opossum, 130-131. 
Orthochromatic plates, see Plates. 
Outfit, protection of, 122. 

See Apparatus for field work. 
Over exposure, see Developing. 


| Papers for printing, 62. 

Passenger pigeon, 8. 

Photography, cleanliness in, 51, 

Gee 

Compared with shooting, 21-24, 
26-28. 

In color, 4. 

“ Photo-Miniature,” 64, 

Pied duck, 8. 

Pinholes in negatives, 51, 52. 

Plate hardeners, see Baths. 

Plate-holders, 86-89. 

Plates, isochromatic, 213, 261. 
Non-halation, 273, 274. 
Orthochromatic, 121, 122, 202, 

212, 213, 254, 279. 

Pleuraotus, genus of fungi, 277. 

Porcupine, 131-134. 

Porta, Baptista, inventor of the 

camera obscura, 30, 31. 
Portuguese man-of-war, 224. 
Printing — 
Background, treatment of, 64- 
65. 
Local, 67. 
Negatives, enlarged, 64. 
Papers used, 62, 63. 
Retouching, 66, 67. 
Skill in, importance of, 62. 
Spotting out, 67. 
Toning, 63. 
Printing-out papers, silver, 62. 
Protective coloring of smaller ani- 
mals, 242. 
Pyro developer, the, 54, 55, 56. 


Raccoon, 134. 

Raptores, food of, 5, 6. 
Rattlesnakes, 229, 231-235. 
Ray filter, 254, 255. 

Reflex camera, see Camera. 


4 


310 


Reptiles, photographing — | 
Antipathy to snakes an obstacle, 
227-229, 
Arrangements for, 235-238. 
233-235. 
Smaller snakes, lizards, frogs, 
etc., 238-241. 
Snapping and water turtles, 242. 
Value of, 243. 
Retouching, 66, 67. 
Fluid, 66, 
Rocky Mountain pika, 128-129. 
Rookeries, water-bird, of Florida, 
188-189. 
Roosevelt, Theodore, 


Rattlesnakes, 232, 


on hunting | 
with camera compared 
with shooting, 24. 
Sea-urchins, see Fish and other 
forms of aquatic life. 
Shrew, the, 136. 
Shufeldt, Dr., a pioneer in photo- 
graphing living fish, 208. 
Shutter — 
Care of, 48. 
Diaphragm, 46, 47. 
Focal plane, 47. 
Knowledge of, essential, 48. 
Silver papers, 62, 63. 
Skunk cabbage, 260, 261. 
Smaller mammals, photographing — 
Beaver, 137. 
Cage, use of, 136. 
Chipmunk, 124. 
Gopher, 130. 
In captivity, 126. 
In native haunts, 126. 
Knowledge necessary, 123, 137. 
Mice, 123, 124-126, 136, 137. 
Moles, 136. 


Opossum, 130-131. 


Index 


Smaller mammals, photographing 
[continued ] — 

Outfit, 135. 

Perseverance essential, 135. 

Porcupine, 131-134. 

Raccoon, 134. 

Rocky Mountain pika, 128-129. 

Shrew, 136. 

Squirrels, 123, 124, 134. 

Weasel, 130. 

Woodchuck, 130. 
Snakes, dangerous and_ harmless, 

discussed, 227-231. 

Sportsman, term explained, 19, 20. 
“Spotting out,” 66, 67. 
Squirrels, 134. : 
298. 
“ Stopping out,” 64, 65. 
Stops, see Lens. 
Swing-back, 35-37, 262, 


Steadman, Frank M., 


275- 


| Telephotographic lens — 


Advantages of, 73-75, 78. 
Capabilities of, 72. 
Described, 70. 
Enlargement over ordinary lens, 
71. 
Exposures with, 77, 78. 
Focussing of, 71. 
Indispensable in nature photog- 
raphy, 80. 
In photographing birds, 186. 
Small mammals, 135. 
Tree builders’ nests, 154. 
Lenses of, 70, 71. 
Precautions in use of, 72, 73. 
Reflex, use in the, 78, 80. 
Results obtained with, 77. 
Shutter for, 73. 
Stops on, 73. 
See Lens. 


Index Baa 


Toadstools, see Fungi. 

Toning bath, 63. 

Trees, fungi, etc., photographing — 
Apparatus, 275. 
Artistic value of, 268-270. 
Light suitable for, 271-273, 276, 
Non-halation plate, 273, 274. 
Wind an obstacle, 271. 


Under exposure of plates, see De- 
veloping. 


Velox paper, 62. 


Wallihan, A. G., 24, 120, 125. 
Washington National Zoo, 281, 
Weasel, 130. 
Wild animals, effect of noise on, 
17. 
Wild flowers, photographing — 
Artistic and scientific value of, 
244-247. 
Compared with photographing 
animal life, 251-253. 
Cut flowers —absolute stillness 
essential, 250, 251. 
Apparatus used, 254, 255. 


Wild flowers, photographing [cov- 

tinued | — 

Arrangement of, 257, 258. 

Focussing and exposure, 255- 
257s 

Indoor work necessary, 250. 

Method of work, 253, 254. 

Wilting, 247-249. 

Flowers growing out of doors — 
All flowers available, 265-267. 
Image, size of, 264. 

Light, regulation of, 264. 
Movement an obstacle, 25S- 
260. 
Specimen and environment 
important, 260, 201. 
Woodchuck, 130. 
Woods, photographing in, see Camps 
and woods. 


Yellowstone Park, 121. 


Zoos, photography in the — 
Apparatus for, 284, 285. 
Difficulties met with, 281. 
Essential points discussed, 285. 


Negatives, manipulation of, 287. 


THE AMERICAN SPORTSMAN’S 
LIBRARY 


Edited by CASPAR WHITNEY 


Crown 8vo Cloth $2.00 net 


SECOND SERIES 


THE SPORTING DOG 


By JOSEPH A. GRAHAM. With many illustrations from photographs. 


AMERICAN YACHTING 


By W. P. STEPHENS. With many illustrations by E. A. ScHELL and Carcton T, 
CHAPMAN. 


THE TROTTING AND THE PACING HORSE 


By HAMILTON BUSBEY. With many illustrations from photographs. 


LAWN TENNIS AND LACROSSE 


By J. PARMLY PARET and WILLIAM HARVEY MADDREN. With many illus- 
trations from photographs. 


PHOTOGRAPHY FOR THE SPORTSMAN 
NATURALIST 
By L. W. BROWNELL. With numerous illustrations from photographs. 


IN PREPARATION 
The American Race Horse, the Running Horse 
Rowing and Track Athletics 
Skating, Hockey, and Kite Sailing 
Baseball and Football 
Riding and Driving 


THE MACMILLAN COMPANY 


66 FIFTH AVENUE, NEW YORK 


THE AMERICAN SPORTSMAN’S LIBRARY 


Edited by CASPAR WHITNEY 


Crown 8vo Cloth Each $2.00 net 


THE DEER FAMILY 


By THEODORE ROOSEVELT, T.S. VAN DYKE, D. G. ELLIOTT, and A. J. 
STONE. With many illustrations by Cart Runaius, and map by Dr. C. Hart 
Merriam. 


UPLAND GAME BIRDS 
By EDWYN SANDYS and T. S. VAN DYKE. With many illustrations by 
L. A. Fuertes, A. B. Frost, J. O. NuGent, and C. L. Butt. 
SALMON AND TROUT 


By DEAN SAGE, W. C. HARRIS, and C. H. TOWNSEND. With many illus- 
trations by A. B. Frost and others. 


THE WATER-FOWL FAMILY 


By LEONARD C. SANFORD, L. B. BISHOP, and T. S. VAN DYKE. With 
many illustrations by L. A. Fuertes, A. B. Frost, and C. L. Butt. 


BASS, PIKE, PERCH, AND PICKEREL 


By JAMES A, HENSHALL, M.D. With many illustrations by Martin Justice 
and others. 


THE BIG GAME FISHES OF THE UNITED STATES 


By CHARLES F. HOLDER. With many illustrations in color by CHARLES F. W. 
Mievavz and others. 


MUSK-OX, BISON, SHEEP, AND GOAT 


By CASPAR WHITNEY, GEORGE BIRD GRINNELL, and OWEN WISTER. 
With many illustrations by CARL Runcius and others, 


GUNS, AMMUNITION, AND TACKLE 


By A. W. MONEY, HORACE KEPHART, W. E. CARLIN, A. L. A. HIMMEL- 
WRIGHT, and J. HARRINGTON KEENE 


In preparation for early issue 


THE BEAR FAMILY 
By DR. C. HART MERRIAM. With illustrations by Cart Runotus and others, 


COUGAR, WILD CAT, WOLF, AND FOX 


THE MACMILLAN COMPANY 
66 Fifth Avenue, New York 


Eieeere 
jess 


re8et- : 


ae 


eae ; 
steer: 


i 
uF 
‘s 


i 


ae 


a 


it 


a 


af 


sipieltes 


3 

Be 
ar) 

Ht 


ai 
at 
dr 


Bs 


A 


ae 


Spat 


Ey 
a 


rat 


i 


ifs tat 
i 
' 


y 
i 


if 
if 


a 


i 


stator 
eaate 


rit 
He eae 
it 5 Hertted 
Etat ae 
be 4 ied 


i 


ga He 


Seats 
ae 


set 


shite 


i 


fs 


(2